1 #LyX 2.4 created this file. For more info see https://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
57 \maintain_unincluded_children no
59 \language_package default
62 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
63 \font_sans "default" "default"
64 \font_typewriter "default" "default"
65 \font_math "auto" "auto"
66 \font_default_family default
67 \use_non_tex_fonts false
71 \font_typewriter_osf false
72 \font_sf_scale 100 100
73 \font_tt_scale 100 100
75 \use_dash_ligatures false
77 \default_output_format default
79 \bibtex_command bibtex
80 \index_command makeindex
81 \float_placement class
82 \float_alignment class
86 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
87 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
91 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
92 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
93 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
98 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
99 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
102 \use_package amsmath 1
103 \use_package amssymb 1
104 \use_package cancel 1
106 \use_package mathdots 1
107 \use_package mathtools 1
108 \use_package mhchem 1
109 \use_package stackrel 1
110 \use_package stmaryrd 1
111 \use_package undertilde 1
113 \cite_engine_type default
117 \paperorientation portrait
123 \notefontcolor #0000ff
140 \paragraph_separation skip
143 \math_numbering_side default
144 \quotes_style english
148 \paperpagestyle default
150 \tracking_changes false
151 \output_changes false
153 \postpone_fragile_content false
157 \author -1402925745 "Günter Milde"
158 \author -712698321 "Jürgen Spitzmüller"
159 \author -584632292 "Richard Kimberly Heck"
160 \author -563046850 "Jean-Marc LASGOUTTES"
162 \author 1675569489 "Stephan Witt"
173 by the \SpecialChar LyX
178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
180 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
181 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
182 Documentation mailing list:
183 \begin_inset CommandInset href
185 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
197 \begin_inset Newline newline
201 \begin_inset Newline newline
205 \begin_inset Note Note
208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
209 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
210 \begin_inset Newline newline
215 https://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/Manuals#UserGuide
223 \begin_layout Standard
224 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
225 LatexCommand tableofcontents
232 \begin_layout Chapter
236 \begin_layout Section
237 What is \SpecialChar LyX
241 \begin_layout Standard
243 is a document preparation system.
244 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
245 scripts, publishable books, business
246 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
247 It is unlike most other
248 \begin_inset Quotes eld
252 \begin_inset Quotes erd
255 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
257 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
258 \begin_inset Quotes eld
262 \begin_inset Quotes erd
266 \begin_inset Quotes eld
270 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
273 pt type, left justified, 5
274 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
278 \begin_inset Quotes erd
283 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
287 \begin_layout Standard
288 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
293 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
297 \begin_layout Standard
302 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
303 's philosophy: most importantly,
304 the format of all of the manuals.
305 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
306 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
312 manual describes that, too.
315 \begin_layout Section
320 \begin_layout Standard
321 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
322 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
324 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
325 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
329 \begin_layout Standard
330 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
331 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
332 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
334 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
335 only a vertical scrollbar.
336 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
337 The first case is large images.
338 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
339 image and use the option
350 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
353 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
354 this doesn't work for equations yet.
357 \begin_layout Standard
358 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
359 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
365 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
367 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
374 \begin_layout Section
378 \begin_layout Standard
379 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
381 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
383 Just select the manual you want to read from the
390 \begin_layout Section
391 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
393 \begin_inset CommandInset label
395 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
402 \begin_layout Standard
403 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
404 can be configured via the menu
406 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
410 \begin_inset Index idx
413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
420 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
422 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
423 packages are available.
424 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
426 Although this configuration has already been done when \SpecialChar LyX
428 your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
429 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
433 \begin_inset space \space{}
436 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
437 classes, and which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
439 To force \SpecialChar LyX
440 to re-inspect your system, you should use
442 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
446 \begin_inset Index idx
449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
450 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
456 You should then restart \SpecialChar LyX
457 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
460 \begin_layout Section
463 \begin_inset CommandInset label
465 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
472 \begin_layout Standard
473 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
474 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
475 installed, but you will not be
476 able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it installed.
477 However, some \SpecialChar LyX
478 documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
479 PDFs and the like, and every \SpecialChar LyX
480 document can always be output as plain text
484 \begin_layout Standard
485 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
486 or DocBook classes or packages.
487 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
488 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
491 \begin_layout Standard
492 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
493 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
494 has found on your system are listed in a file you can
497 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
505 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
506 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
509 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
513 \begin_inset Index idx
516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
517 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
525 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
532 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
536 \begin_layout Chapter
537 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
541 \begin_layout Section
542 Basic File Operations
543 \begin_inset Index idx
546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
555 \begin_layout Standard
560 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
561 in addition to some more advanced operations:
564 \begin_layout Itemize
586 \begin_layout Itemize
602 arg "buffer-new-template"
608 \begin_layout Itemize
630 \begin_layout Itemize
638 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352530
642 \begin_layout Itemize
644 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352546
656 \begin_layout Itemize
668 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353355
672 \begin_layout Itemize
674 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353357
682 \begin_layout Itemize
704 \begin_layout Itemize
716 arg "buffer-write-as"
720 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352570
724 \begin_layout Itemize
726 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352997
742 \begin_layout Itemize
756 \begin_layout Itemize
770 \begin_layout Standard
771 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
772 a few minor differences.
775 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
786 command lists the available templates.
787 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features
788 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353491
789 and possibly propose text fragments
791 for the document, features
792 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353500
795 you would otherwise need to
796 \change_deleted -712698321 1553353510
798 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353510
802 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353505
806 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
812 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
814 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
820 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353657
821 You can also add your own templates to this list by means of storing a
825 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
833 \begin_layout Standard
834 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
843 \begin_inset Quotes eld
847 \begin_inset Quotes erd
851 \begin_inset Quotes eld
855 \begin_inset Quotes erd
859 \begin_inset Quotes eld
863 \begin_inset Quotes erd
866 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
867 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
868 is just that — a big, blank space.
876 \begin_layout Standard
897 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
902 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
905 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
923 will reload the document from disk.
924 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
925 and want to restore it to the last save.
934 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
935 them as your changes.
938 \begin_layout Section
939 Basic Editing Features
940 \begin_inset Index idx
943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
950 \begin_inset CommandInset label
952 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
959 \begin_layout Standard
960 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
961 can perform cut and paste operations
962 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
963 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
964 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
965 editing features and how to access
967 We will start with cut and paste.
970 \begin_layout Standard
971 As you might expect, the
975 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
976 various other editing features.
977 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
981 \begin_layout Itemize
987 \begin_inset Index idx
990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1019 \begin_layout Itemize
1025 \begin_inset Index idx
1028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1057 \begin_layout Itemize
1063 \begin_inset Index idx
1066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1091 \begin_layout Itemize
1095 \begin_inset space ~
1101 \begin_layout Itemize
1105 \begin_inset space ~
1111 \begin_layout Itemize
1115 \begin_inset space ~
1119 \begin_inset space ~
1125 \begin_inset Index idx
1128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1137 \begin_inset Index idx
1140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1155 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1165 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1171 \begin_layout Standard
1172 The first three are self-explanatory.
1173 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1174 and other programs by
1195 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1196 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1201 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1202 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1203 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1204 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1205 into individual cells.
1209 \begin_inset space ~
1214 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1215 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1219 \begin_layout Standard
1223 \begin_inset space ~
1228 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1230 These include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1232 \begin_inset space ~
1239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1245 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1246 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1247 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1249 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1253 \begin_inset space \space{}
1256 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1257 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1260 \begin_inset space ~
1263 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1265 \begin_inset space ~
1269 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1273 \begin_inset space ~
1282 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1283 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1285 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1289 \begin_inset space ~
1294 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1295 start a new paragraph.
1296 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1297 a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1302 \begin_inset space ~
1305 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1307 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1311 \begin_inset space ~
1319 \begin_inset space ~
1322 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1325 paste from the primary selection.
1326 This is normally the currently selected text.
1329 \begin_layout Standard
1332 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1334 \begin_inset space ~
1338 \begin_inset space ~
1346 \begin_inset space ~
1350 \begin_inset space ~
1356 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1362 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1365 \begin_inset space ~
1374 \begin_inset space ~
1379 button to skip the current word.
1383 \begin_inset space ~
1388 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1392 \begin_inset space ~
1397 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1399 If the toggle is set, searching for
1400 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1408 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1411 will not match the word
1412 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1420 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1426 Match whole words only
1428 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1429 to only find complete words, e.
1430 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1434 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1442 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1446 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1454 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1459 offers also an advanced
1462 \begin_inset space ~
1466 \begin_inset space ~
1471 feature that is described in section
1472 \begin_inset space ~
1476 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1478 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1485 \begin_layout Standard
1486 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1487 \begin_inset space \space{}
1491 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1495 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1499 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1501 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1506 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1513 \begin_layout Standard
1517 arg "inset-select-all"
1520 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1521 When the cursor is inside an inset
1524 arg "inset-select-all"
1527 selects the content of the inset.
1531 arg "inset-select-all"
1534 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1539 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1542 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1546 \begin_layout Section
1548 \begin_inset Index idx
1551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1558 \begin_inset Index idx
1561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1568 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1570 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1577 \begin_layout Standard
1578 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1580 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1583 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1586 or the toolbar button
1592 to undo some mistake.
1593 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1595 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1598 or the toolbar button
1605 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1609 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1612 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1613 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1616 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1619 \begin_layout Standard
1620 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1622 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1626 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1629 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1630 This is a consequence of the 100
1631 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1634 step undo limit mentioned above.
1637 \begin_layout Standard
1646 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1648 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1652 \begin_layout Section
1654 \begin_inset Index idx
1657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1666 \begin_layout Standard
1667 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1670 \begin_layout Enumerate
1675 \begin_layout Itemize
1680 once anywhere in the edit window.
1681 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1685 \begin_layout Enumerate
1690 \begin_layout Itemize
1697 marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1700 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1703 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1704 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1707 \begin_layout Itemize
1708 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1711 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1718 \begin_layout Enumerate
1719 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1723 \begin_layout Standard
1724 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1725 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1729 \begin_layout Section
1731 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1733 name "sec:Navigating"
1738 \begin_inset Index idx
1741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1750 \begin_layout Standard
1752 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1755 \begin_layout Itemize
1760 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1761 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1764 \begin_layout Itemize
1765 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1767 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1769 \begin_inset space ~
1774 or by the toolbar button
1777 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1783 \begin_layout Itemize
1784 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1786 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1789 and use the same menu to return to them.
1790 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1793 \begin_layout Standard
1797 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1802 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1803 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1805 \begin_inset space ~
1810 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1811 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1812 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1813 your last editing position.
1816 \begin_layout Standard
1821 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1825 \begin_layout Subsection
1827 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1829 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1834 \begin_inset Index idx
1837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1838 Navigating ! Outline
1844 \begin_inset Index idx
1847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1856 \begin_layout Standard
1857 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1858 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1859 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1861 \begin_inset space ~
1865 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1867 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1871 ), or notes, or citations (see section
1872 \begin_inset space ~
1876 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1878 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1883 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1887 \begin_layout Standard
1888 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1889 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1890 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1891 dialog and to modify the citation.
1894 \begin_layout Standard
1899 field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear in the outline.
1900 For example, if you are displaying the list of
1902 Labels and References
1904 and wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1906 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1910 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1913 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1916 \begin_layout Standard
1917 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1918 you further to control the display.
1923 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1924 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1930 option keeps it in the current view state.
1931 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1932 \begin_inset space ~
1935 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1936 \begin_inset space ~
1939 3, the subsections of sections
1940 \begin_inset space ~
1943 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1948 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1949 \begin_inset space ~
1953 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1955 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1959 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1963 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1966 \begin_layout Standard
1973 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1974 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1988 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1989 So, for example, you can move section
1990 \begin_inset space ~
1994 \begin_inset space ~
1997 2.4 or after section
1998 \begin_inset space ~
2003 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
2016 (or the corresponding key bindings
2024 ) you can change the level of sections.
2025 So you can for example make section
2026 \begin_inset space ~
2030 \begin_inset space ~
2034 \begin_inset space ~
2040 \begin_layout Standard
2041 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole
2042 section to copy, cut or delete it.
2045 \begin_layout Subsection
2046 Horizontal Scrolling
2047 \begin_inset Index idx
2050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2051 Navigating ! Horizontal Scrolling
2059 \begin_layout Standard
2061 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because the standard output page formats
2063 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2067 \begin_inset space \space{}
2071 \begin_inset space ~
2074 A4 are less wide than PC or laptop screens.
2075 Therefore you will get troubles in the output of your document if document
2076 parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
2080 \begin_layout Standard
2081 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
2085 \begin_layout Itemize
2087 is used on a small tablet computer
2090 \begin_layout Itemize
2091 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
2095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2103 \begin_inset space ~
2116 \begin_layout Itemize
2117 Math constructs with long command names
2120 \begin_layout Standard
2121 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2122 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor
2124 As example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2125 windows so that table
2126 \begin_inset space ~
2130 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2132 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2137 You will now see a dotted red line at the right or the left side of the
2139 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys
2140 to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2143 \begin_layout Standard
2144 \begin_inset Float table
2151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2152 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2155 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2157 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2161 Horizontal scrolling test.
2169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2171 \begin_inset Tabular
2172 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2173 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2174 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2175 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2176 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2187 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2196 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2218 \begin_layout Section
2219 Input/Word Completion
2220 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2222 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2227 \begin_inset Index idx
2230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2237 \begin_inset Index idx
2240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2271 \begin_layout Standard
2273 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2275 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2276 is used to propose completions.
2279 \begin_layout Standard
2280 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2283 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2288 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2295 \begin_inset space ~
2299 \begin_inset space ~
2304 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2308 \begin_inset space ~
2313 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2314 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2318 \begin_inset space ~
2324 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2325 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2326 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2327 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2330 \begin_layout Standard
2332 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2333 completions available.
2338 key to accept a proposed completion.
2339 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2340 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2341 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2348 \begin_layout Standard
2349 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2350 ing options for text.
2352 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340017
2354 \change_deleted -563046850 1560340019
2356 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340019
2359 he special math option
2363 enables characters to be composed.
2364 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2365 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2368 , you can then input the characters
2369 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2377 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2380 to a formula to get it.
2381 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2382 of the math toolbar.
2383 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2387 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2388 's installation folder.
2390 \change_deleted -563046850 1560340086
2391 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2398 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340324
2403 after autocorrection has done its magic leaves the un-corrected sequence.
2404 In the example above,
2409 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2417 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2425 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2433 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2441 \begin_layout Section
2443 \begin_inset Index idx
2446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2453 \begin_inset Index idx
2456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2485 \begin_inset Index idx
2488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2519 \begin_layout Standard
2520 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2534 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2537 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2541 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
2542 \begin_inset space ~
2546 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2548 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2555 \begin_layout Standard
2559 \begin_inset space ~
2567 \begin_inset space ~
2588 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2592 \begin_layout Labeling
2593 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2597 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2598 LatexCommand nomenclature
2600 description "Tabulator key"
2607 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2609 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2610 \begin_inset space ~
2614 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2616 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2621 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2623 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2627 , especially section
2628 \begin_inset space ~
2632 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2634 reference "subsec:Lists"
2640 If you are still confused, look in the
2645 \begin_inset Newline newline
2653 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2654 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2658 \begin_layout Labeling
2659 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2663 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2664 LatexCommand nomenclature
2666 description "Escape key"
2674 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2678 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2681 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2682 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2685 \begin_layout Labeling
2686 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2692 \begin_inset space ~
2696 \begin_inset space ~
2703 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2704 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2708 \begin_layout Standard
2709 There are three modifier keys:
2712 \begin_layout Labeling
2713 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2719 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2727 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2731 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2732 LatexCommand nomenclature
2734 description "Control key"
2739 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2740 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2744 \begin_layout Itemize
2753 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2756 \begin_layout Itemize
2765 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2768 \begin_layout Itemize
2777 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2781 \begin_layout Labeling
2782 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2788 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2796 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2800 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2801 LatexCommand nomenclature
2803 description "Shift key"
2808 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2809 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2812 \begin_layout Labeling
2813 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2819 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2827 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2831 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2832 LatexCommand nomenclature
2834 description "Alt or Meta key"
2839 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2840 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2841 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2847 \begin_inset Newline newline
2850 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2852 menu accelerator keys
2855 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2856 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2860 \begin_layout Standard
2861 For example, the sequence
2862 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2868 \begin_inset space ~
2872 \begin_inset space ~
2878 \begin_inset space ~
2886 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2890 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2894 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2899 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2905 \begin_inset space ~
2911 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2921 \begin_layout Standard
2926 manual lists all other things bound to the
2934 \begin_layout Standard
2935 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2937 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
2938 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2939 's main window which describes the name of the action you
2940 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2941 The \SpecialChar LyX
2942 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2943 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2944 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2946 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2947 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2955 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2962 followed by a capital
2969 \begin_layout Chapter
2972 \begin_inset Index idx
2975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2985 \begin_layout Section
2987 \begin_inset Index idx
2990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2999 \begin_layout Subsection
3003 \begin_layout Standard
3004 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
3005 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
3006 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
3007 numbering schemes, and so on.
3008 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
3009 and format the title of your document differently.
3012 \begin_layout Standard
3017 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
3018 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
3019 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
3020 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
3021 picks one for you by default.
3022 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
3025 \begin_layout Subsection
3027 \begin_inset Index idx
3030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3037 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3039 name "sec:Document-Classes"
3046 \begin_layout Standard
3047 You can select a class using the
3049 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3050 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3054 \begin_inset Index idx
3057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3064 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
3068 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3072 \begin_layout Standard
3073 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
3078 \begin_layout Description
3079 Article for basic articles
3082 \begin_layout Description
3083 Report for basic reports
3086 \begin_layout Description
3087 Book for writing a book
3090 \begin_layout Description
3091 Letter for US-style letters
3094 \begin_layout Standard
3095 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
3096 only uses if you have installed
3097 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
3098 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
3099 distributions will include
3101 Here are some of the classes.
3102 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
3104 Special Document Classes
3113 \begin_layout Description
3114 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
3117 \begin_layout Description
3118 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
3122 \begin_layout Description
3123 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
3127 \begin_layout Description
3128 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
3129 Mathematical Society (AMS).
3130 There are three article layouts available.
3131 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
3132 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
3133 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
3134 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
3136 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3139 sequential numbering
3140 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3143 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
3144 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
3145 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
3146 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
3149 \begin_layout Description
3150 Beamer Layout for presentations
3153 \begin_layout Description
3154 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
3155 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3156 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3157 with \SpecialChar LyX
3161 \begin_layout Description
3162 Chess Layout to write about chess games
3165 \begin_layout Description
3167 \begin_inset space ~
3170 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3173 \begin_layout Description
3174 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3177 \begin_layout Description
3178 Foils Used to make transparencies
3181 \begin_layout Description
3182 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3183 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3184 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3185 with \SpecialChar LyX
3189 \begin_layout Description
3190 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
3191 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3194 \begin_layout Description
3195 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3198 \begin_layout Description
3199 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3202 \begin_layout Description
3203 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
3204 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
3205 (Is used by this document.)
3208 \begin_layout Description
3209 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3212 \begin_layout Description
3213 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3216 \begin_layout Description
3221 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
3222 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
3224 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3228 \begin_layout Description
3229 Slides Used to make transparencies
3232 \begin_layout Description
3234 \begin_inset space ~
3237 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
3238 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3241 \begin_layout Description
3242 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3245 \begin_layout Standard
3246 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
3248 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3250 Special Document Classes
3257 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3258 of the document classes.
3261 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3265 \begin_layout Standard
3266 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3268 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3269 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3271 \begin_inset Index idx
3274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3283 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3287 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3291 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3292 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3294 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3297 \begin_layout Standard
3300 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3305 , are highly specialized.
3307 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3308 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3309 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3310 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3311 by some document class.
3312 There are just too many of them.
3313 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3316 \begin_layout Standard
3317 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3318 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3322 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3325 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3326 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3327 document class for a new file.
3329 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3332 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3339 manual for information on how to install them.
3340 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3346 \begin_layout Standard
3347 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3348 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3349 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3350 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3351 class files to be used for dissertation
3352 s submitted to those universities.
3353 The \SpecialChar LyX
3354 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3356 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3360 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3366 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3369 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3371 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3373 name "subsec:Modules"
3378 \begin_inset Index idx
3381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3390 \begin_layout Standard
3391 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3392 chosen document class.
3393 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3394 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3401 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3405 \begin_inset Index idx
3408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3415 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3419 \begin_layout Standard
3420 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3421 packages or file format converters that are not always
3422 installed by default.
3424 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3425 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3426 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3427 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3429 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3430 file without the missing prerequisites.
3431 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3432 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3435 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3439 \begin_inset Index idx
3442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3443 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3449 See section Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3454 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3457 \begin_layout Standard
3458 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3466 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3468 will advise you about these things.
3476 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3478 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3480 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3485 \begin_inset Index idx
3488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3489 Document ! Local Layout
3497 \begin_layout Standard
3498 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3499 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3500 : They are intended to be used in
3501 a variety of different documents.
3502 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3503 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3504 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3505 need a specific inset or
3506 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757388
3508 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757388
3511 style only that one time.
3512 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3514 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3516 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3520 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3532 manual for information on how to use it.
3535 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3539 \begin_layout Standard
3540 Each class has a default set of options.
3541 Here's a quick table describing them:
3544 \begin_layout Standard
3545 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3551 \begin_layout Standard
3553 \begin_inset Tabular
3554 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3555 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3556 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3557 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3558 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3559 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3560 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3562 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3571 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3589 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3607 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3625 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3645 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3662 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3680 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3698 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3716 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3736 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3753 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3771 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3789 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3827 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3844 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3862 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3880 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3898 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3918 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3953 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3971 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3989 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4014 \begin_layout Standard
4015 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
4021 \begin_layout Standard
4022 You're probably also wondering what
4023 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4027 \begin_inset space ~
4031 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4035 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
4036 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
4041 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
4046 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
4056 headings, there are also
4064 headings, and so on.
4065 We will describe these headings fully in section
4066 \begin_inset space ~
4070 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4072 reference "subsec:Headings"
4079 \begin_layout Subsection
4081 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4083 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
4088 \begin_inset Index idx
4091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4098 \begin_inset Index idx
4101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4110 \begin_layout Standard
4111 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
4113 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4120 \begin_inset space ~
4128 \begin_inset space ~
4133 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
4135 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
4136 doesn't support special options you want to
4137 use for your document.
4138 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
4139 -class and its options, you have to read
4143 \begin_layout Standard
4147 \begin_inset space ~
4154 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4160 \begin_inset space ~
4165 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
4166 You can choose between the following five options:
4169 \begin_layout Labeling
4170 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4175 Use default page style of current class.
4178 \begin_layout Labeling
4179 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4184 No page numbers or headings.
4187 \begin_layout Labeling
4188 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4196 \begin_layout Labeling
4197 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4202 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4203 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4204 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
4205 maximum sectioning level of the class.
4208 \begin_layout Labeling
4209 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4214 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
4215 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4221 \begin_inset Index idx
4224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4232 How they are defined is explained in section
4233 \begin_inset space ~
4237 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4239 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4246 \begin_layout Standard
4247 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4248 \begin_inset space ~
4252 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4254 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4261 \begin_layout Subsection
4262 Paper Size and Orientation
4263 \begin_inset Index idx
4266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4267 Document ! Paper size
4273 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4275 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4282 \begin_layout Standard
4283 You can find the following options in the menu
4286 \begin_inset space ~
4293 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4297 \begin_inset Index idx
4300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4309 \begin_layout Labeling
4310 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4314 \begin_inset space ~
4319 What size paper to print on.
4324 \begin_layout Itemize
4330 \begin_layout Itemize
4336 \begin_layout Itemize
4342 \begin_layout Itemize
4348 \begin_layout Itemize
4351 US letter, US legal, US executive
4354 \begin_layout Itemize
4360 \begin_layout Itemize
4367 \begin_layout Labeling
4368 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4373 To choose whether to output as
4384 \begin_layout Labeling
4385 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4389 \begin_inset space ~
4394 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4395 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4398 \begin_layout Subsection
4400 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4402 name "subsec:Margins"
4407 \begin_inset Index idx
4410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4417 \begin_inset Index idx
4420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4429 \begin_layout Standard
4430 Paper margins are set in the menu
4432 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4436 \begin_inset Index idx
4439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4448 \begin_layout Standard
4449 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4450 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4451 the paper format and the font size into account.
4454 \begin_layout Subsection
4458 \begin_layout Standard
4459 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4465 That includes the paragraph environments.
4466 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4467 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4468 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4470 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4471 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4475 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4479 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4481 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4482 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4483 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4486 \begin_layout Section
4487 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4488 \begin_inset Index idx
4491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4492 Paragraph ! Indentation
4500 \begin_layout Subsection
4502 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4504 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4511 \begin_layout Standard
4512 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4513 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4516 \begin_layout Standard
4517 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4518 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4519 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4520 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4524 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4530 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4531 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4532 language than English.
4534 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4537 \begin_layout Standard
4538 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4539 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4540 into \SpecialChar LyX
4542 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4545 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4547 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4548 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4549 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4556 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4557 goes to produce a printable file.
4562 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4564 gives you the ability globally to change
4568 these pre-coded spacings.
4569 We will explain more later.
4572 \begin_layout Subsection
4573 Paragraph Separation
4574 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4576 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4581 \begin_inset Index idx
4584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4585 Paragraph ! Separation
4593 \begin_layout Standard
4601 \begin_inset space ~
4609 \begin_inset space ~
4616 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4620 \begin_inset Index idx
4623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4629 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4632 \begin_layout Subsection
4636 \begin_layout Standard
4637 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4640 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4642 \begin_inset space ~
4647 dialog and toggle the
4650 \begin_inset space ~
4655 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4658 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4662 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4663 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4667 \begin_layout Standard
4668 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4669 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4672 \begin_layout Subsection
4674 \begin_inset Index idx
4677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4678 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4686 \begin_layout Standard
4689 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4693 \begin_inset Index idx
4696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4705 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4709 \begin_inset space ~
4718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4719 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4725 \begin_inset Index idx
4728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4735 installed to use this feature.
4740 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4742 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4744 \begin_inset space ~
4749 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4750 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4753 \begin_layout Section
4754 Paragraph Environments
4755 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4757 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4762 \begin_inset Index idx
4765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4766 Paragraph ! Environments
4772 \begin_inset Index idx
4775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4776 Paragraph environments|(
4784 \begin_layout Subsection
4788 \begin_layout Standard
4789 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4792 \begin_layout Standard
4801 } \SpecialChar ldots
4811 \begin_inset Newline newline
4814 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4816 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4817 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4818 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4827 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4830 \begin_layout Standard
4831 A paragraph environment is simply a
4832 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4836 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4839 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4840 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4841 scheme, labels, and so on.
4842 Additionally, you can
4843 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4847 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4850 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4851 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4852 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4853 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4855 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4857 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4860 \begin_layout Standard
4861 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4862 \begin_inset Graphics
4863 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4869 at the left end of the toolbar.
4871 will change the environment of the
4875 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4876 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4877 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4881 \begin_layout Standard
4890 create a new paragraph using the
4894 paragraph environment.
4896 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4900 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4903 because if you are in one of these environments:
4906 \begin_layout Itemize
4912 \begin_layout Itemize
4918 \begin_layout Itemize
4924 \begin_layout Itemize
4930 \begin_layout Itemize
4936 \begin_layout Itemize
4942 \begin_layout Itemize
4948 \begin_layout Standard
4950 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4954 , rather than resetting it to
4959 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4960 \begin_inset space ~
4964 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4966 reference "sec:Nesting"
4973 \begin_layout Subsection
4977 \begin_layout Standard
4978 The default paragraph environment is
4983 It creates a plain paragraph.
4985 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4986 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4987 this manual) are in the
4994 \begin_layout Standard
4995 You can nest a paragraph using the
4999 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
5007 \begin_layout Subsection
5009 \begin_inset Index idx
5012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5021 \begin_layout Standard
5022 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
5023 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
5025 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5029 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5032 for thanks or contact information.
5033 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
5034 places all of this on a separate page
5035 along with today's date.
5036 For other types of documents, the title
5037 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5041 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5044 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
5048 \begin_layout Standard
5050 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
5064 Here's how you use them:
5067 \begin_layout Itemize
5068 Put the title of your document in the
5075 \begin_layout Itemize
5076 Put the author name in the
5083 \begin_layout Itemize
5084 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
5085 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
5091 Note that using this environment is optional.
5092 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
5093 will automatically insert today's date.
5094 If you don't want a date, use the option
5096 Suppress default date on front page
5100 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5101 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
5103 \begin_inset space ~
5111 \begin_layout Standard
5112 You can use footnotes to insert
5113 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5117 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5120 or contact information.
5123 \begin_layout Subsection
5125 \begin_inset Index idx
5128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5135 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5137 name "subsec:Headings"
5144 \begin_layout Standard
5145 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
5147 takes care of the numbering for you.
5150 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5152 \begin_inset Index idx
5155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5156 Section headings ! Numbered
5164 \begin_layout Standard
5165 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
5169 \begin_layout Enumerate
5175 \begin_layout Enumerate
5181 \begin_layout Enumerate
5187 \begin_layout Enumerate
5193 \begin_layout Enumerate
5199 \begin_layout Enumerate
5205 \begin_layout Enumerate
5211 \begin_layout Standard
5213 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
5214 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
5215 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
5218 \begin_layout Standard
5219 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
5220 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
5221 You group the book into chapters.
5223 does a similar grouping:
5226 \begin_layout Itemize
5231 is divided into either
5242 \begin_layout Itemize
5254 \begin_layout Itemize
5266 \begin_layout Itemize
5278 \begin_layout Itemize
5290 \begin_layout Itemize
5302 \begin_layout Standard
5303 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5311 Not all document types use the
5315 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5320 is the top-level heading.
5328 \begin_layout Standard
5333 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5334 labels it with its number,
5335 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5337 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5339 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5343 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5349 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5351 \begin_inset Index idx
5354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5355 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5363 \begin_layout Standard
5364 The unnumbered section headings have a
5365 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5369 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5372 at the end of their name.
5373 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5374 the table of contents, see section
5375 \begin_inset space ~
5379 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5388 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5389 Changing the Numbering
5390 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5392 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5399 \begin_layout Standard
5400 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5401 in the Table of Contents.
5402 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5404 Just as certain classes start with
5418 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5428 This is something you can change.
5431 \begin_layout Standard
5434 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5438 \begin_inset Index idx
5441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5450 \begin_inset space ~
5454 \begin_inset space ~
5459 you will see two counters.
5464 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5465 numbers a section heading.
5466 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5470 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5471 Short Titles of Headings
5472 \begin_inset Index idx
5475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5476 Section headings ! Short titles
5482 \begin_inset Argument 1
5485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5492 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5494 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5501 \begin_layout Standard
5502 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5503 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5504 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5505 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5508 \begin_layout Standard
5510 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5511 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5512 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5513 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5516 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5518 \begin_inset space ~
5524 This will insert a box labeled
5525 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5529 \begin_inset space ~
5533 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5536 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5537 This also works for captions inside floats.
5538 There can only be one short title per title.
5541 \begin_layout Standard
5542 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5545 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5549 \begin_layout Standard
5550 The following information applies to all section headings:
5553 \begin_layout Itemize
5554 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5557 \begin_layout Itemize
5558 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5561 \begin_layout Itemize
5562 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5565 \begin_layout Itemize
5566 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5569 \begin_layout Subsection
5573 \begin_layout Standard
5575 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5589 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5590 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5591 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5592 the text they contain.
5593 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5601 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5604 \begin_layout Standard
5605 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5614 when you start a new paragraph.
5615 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5619 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5620 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5621 have to change back to the
5625 environment yourself.
5628 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5630 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5637 \begin_inset Index idx
5640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5649 \begin_layout Standard
5650 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5651 time for the differences.
5660 are identical except for one difference:
5664 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5673 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5676 \begin_layout Standard
5677 Here's an example of the
5690 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5692 See – no indentation!
5696 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5697 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5698 the other paragraph.
5701 \begin_layout Standard
5702 Here's another example, this time in the
5709 \begin_layout Quotation
5715 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5716 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5717 the first line, then
5721 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5725 you were quoting other text.
5728 \begin_layout Quotation
5729 Here's a new paragraph.
5730 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5731 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5734 \begin_layout Standard
5735 As the examples show,
5739 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5740 They should put quotes in the
5745 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5749 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5752 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5754 \begin_inset Index idx
5757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5764 \begin_inset Index idx
5767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5774 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5783 \begin_layout Standard
5788 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5794 \begin_inset Newline newline
5797 Which I did not rehearse!
5801 It could be much worse.
5802 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5804 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5805 indented a bit more than the first.
5806 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5812 \begin_inset Newline newline
5815 And make things look fine
5816 \begin_inset Newline newline
5822 arg "newline-insert newline"
5828 \begin_layout Standard
5833 does not indent both margins.
5834 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5835 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5838 arg "newline-insert newline"
5844 \begin_layout Subsection
5846 \begin_inset Index idx
5849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5856 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5865 \begin_layout Standard
5867 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5877 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5878 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5887 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5888 lets you provide your own label.
5889 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5890 describing some general features of all four of them.
5893 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5897 \begin_layout Standard
5898 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5900 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5901 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5910 reset the environment to
5914 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5915 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5916 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5920 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5924 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5931 \begin_layout Standard
5932 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5933 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5934 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5936 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5937 you read all of section
5938 \begin_inset space ~
5942 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5944 reference "sec:Nesting"
5951 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5953 \begin_inset Index idx
5956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5963 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5972 \begin_layout Standard
5973 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5977 paragraph environment.
5978 It has the following properties:
5981 \begin_layout Itemize
5982 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5986 \begin_layout Itemize
5988 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5991 \begin_layout Itemize
5992 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5996 \begin_layout Itemize
5997 The items can have any length.
5999 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
6000 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
6007 \begin_layout Itemize
6012 environment inside another
6016 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
6020 \begin_layout Itemize
6021 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
6024 \begin_layout Itemize
6026 always shows the same symbol on screen.
6029 \begin_layout Itemize
6031 \begin_inset space ~
6035 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6037 reference "sec:Nesting"
6041 for a full explanation of nesting.
6045 \begin_layout Standard
6046 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
6055 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
6058 \begin_layout Standard
6059 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
6060 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
6063 \begin_layout Itemize
6064 The label for the first level
6068 is a large black dot, or bullet.
6072 \begin_layout Itemize
6073 The label for the second level is a dash.
6077 \begin_layout Itemize
6078 The label for the third is an asterisk.
6082 \begin_layout Itemize
6083 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
6087 \begin_layout Itemize
6088 Back out to the third level.
6092 \begin_layout Itemize
6093 Back to the second level.
6097 \begin_layout Itemize
6098 Back to the outermost level.
6101 \begin_layout Standard
6102 These are the default labels for an
6107 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
6109 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
6112 dialog in the submenu
6117 \begin_inset Index idx
6120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6126 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
6130 \begin_layout Standard
6131 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
6132 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
6134 \begin_inset space ~
6138 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6140 reference "sec:Nesting"
6147 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6149 \begin_inset Index idx
6152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6159 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6161 name "sec:Enumerate"
6168 \begin_layout Standard
6173 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
6174 It has these properties:
6177 \begin_layout Enumerate
6178 Each item has a numeral as its label.
6182 \begin_layout Enumerate
6183 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
6187 \begin_layout Enumerate
6189 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
6192 \begin_layout Enumerate
6197 environment resets the counter to one.
6200 \begin_layout Enumerate
6213 \begin_layout Enumerate
6214 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
6215 Items can have any length.
6218 \begin_layout Enumerate
6219 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
6222 \begin_layout Enumerate
6223 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
6226 \begin_layout Enumerate
6227 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
6231 \begin_layout Standard
6240 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6242 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6243 labels the four different levels in an
6250 \begin_layout Enumerate
6251 The first level of an
6255 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6259 \begin_layout Enumerate
6260 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6264 \begin_layout Enumerate
6265 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6269 \begin_layout Enumerate
6270 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6273 \begin_layout Enumerate
6274 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6279 \begin_layout Enumerate
6280 Back to the third level
6284 \begin_layout Enumerate
6285 Back to the second level.
6289 \begin_layout Enumerate
6290 Back to the outermost level.
6293 \begin_layout Standard
6294 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6298 environment, see section
6299 \begin_inset space ~
6303 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6305 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6310 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6314 \begin_layout Standard
6315 There is more to nesting
6319 environments than we've stated here.
6320 You should read section
6321 \begin_inset space ~
6325 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6327 reference "sec:Nesting"
6331 to learn more about nesting.
6334 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6336 \begin_inset Index idx
6339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6348 \begin_layout Standard
6349 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6353 list has no fixed label.
6354 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6356 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6360 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6363 of the first line as the label.
6367 \begin_layout Description
6368 Example: This is an example of the
6375 \begin_layout Standard
6377 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6381 \begin_layout Standard
6383 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6387 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6390 it is meant that the first usage of the
6394 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6396 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6404 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6409 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6410 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6412 \begin_inset space ~
6418 \begin_inset space ~
6422 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6424 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6428 for more information.) Here is an example:
6431 \begin_layout Description
6433 \begin_inset space ~
6436 Example: This one shows how to use a
6439 \begin_inset space ~
6451 \begin_layout Description
6452 Usage: You should use the
6456 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6457 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6459 It's not a good idea to use a
6463 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6464 You're better off using
6476 paragraphs into them.
6479 \begin_layout Description
6480 Nesting: You can nest
6484 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6488 \begin_layout Standard
6489 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6490 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6491 them from the first line.
6494 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6496 \begin_inset Index idx
6499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6508 \begin_layout Standard
6513 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6514 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6518 \begin_layout Standard
6527 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6529 Here are its properties:
6532 \begin_layout Labeling
6533 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6535 \begin_inset space ~
6538 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6540 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6544 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6547 of each line as the item label.
6552 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6553 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6554 space as described above.
6557 \begin_layout Labeling
6558 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6559 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6560 uses different margins for the item label and the
6561 body of the item text.
6562 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6563 label width plus a little extra space.
6567 \begin_layout Labeling
6568 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6570 \begin_inset space ~
6573 width \SpecialChar LyX
6574 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6575 If the label width is larger, the label
6576 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6580 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6583 into the first line.
6584 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6585 margin of the rest of the item text.
6588 \begin_layout Labeling
6589 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6591 \begin_inset space ~
6594 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6599 environment has the same left margin.
6600 \begin_inset Newline newline
6603 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6606 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6608 \begin_inset space ~
6613 dialog (toolbar button
6616 arg "layout-paragraph"
6623 \begin_inset space ~
6628 determines the default label width.
6629 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6631 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6635 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6638 multiple times instead.
6639 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6642 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6646 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6649 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6652 \begin_inset space ~
6657 every time you alter a label in a
6662 \begin_inset Newline newline
6665 The predefined default width is the length of
6666 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6670 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6674 \begin_inset space ~
6680 \begin_layout Standard
6685 list the same way as the
6689 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6695 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6699 \begin_layout Standard
6704 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6705 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6707 \begin_inset space ~
6711 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6713 reference "sec:Nesting"
6717 to learn about nesting.
6720 \begin_layout Standard
6721 There is yet another feature of the
6725 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6726 left-justifies the item labels by
6728 You can use additional
6732 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6733 justifies the item label.
6738 are documented in section
6739 \begin_inset space ~
6743 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6745 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6750 Here are some examples:
6753 \begin_layout Labeling
6754 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6755 Left The default for
6762 \begin_layout Labeling
6763 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6764 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6771 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6774 \begin_layout Labeling
6775 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6776 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6780 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6787 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6790 \begin_layout Subsection
6792 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6794 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6799 \begin_inset Index idx
6802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6811 \begin_layout Standard
6812 The features described in this section require that the module
6814 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6816 is loaded in the document settings.
6817 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6823 \begin_inset Index idx
6826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6836 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6837 Custom Enumerate Lists
6838 \begin_inset Index idx
6841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6842 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6850 \begin_layout Standard
6852 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6855 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6858 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6859 There you add the command
6862 \begin_layout Standard
6870 \begin_layout Standard
6882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6883 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6884 Code, look at section
6885 \begin_inset space ~
6889 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6891 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6904 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6911 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6912 For capital Roman numerals replace
6924 in the command above.
6925 For Arabic numerals use
6933 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6937 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6940 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6955 \begin_layout Standard
6957 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6965 You can only number 26
6966 \begin_inset space ~
6969 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6977 \begin_layout Standard
6978 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6979 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6982 \begin_layout Standard
6983 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6986 \begin_layout Enumerate
6987 \begin_inset Argument 1
6990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7016 \begin_layout Enumerate
7017 \begin_inset Argument 1
7020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7043 \begin_layout Enumerate
7048 \begin_layout Enumerate
7049 \begin_inset Argument 1
7052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7076 \begin_layout Enumerate
7077 \begin_inset Argument 1
7080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7106 \begin_layout Standard
7107 For this list these commands were used:
7110 \begin_layout Standard
7121 \begin_inset Newline newline
7129 \begin_inset Newline newline
7137 \begin_inset Newline newline
7147 \begin_layout Standard
7154 makes the label emphasized and
7163 \begin_layout Standard
7164 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7172 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
7173 lists until you change the definition.
7181 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7183 \begin_inset Index idx
7186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7187 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
7195 \begin_layout Standard
7196 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
7199 \begin_layout Enumerate
7200 \begin_inset Argument 1
7203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7222 \begin_inset Note Note
7225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7226 goes back to default numbering
7234 \begin_layout Enumerate
7238 \begin_layout Standard
7242 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7246 \begin_layout Standard
7247 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7252 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7253 to indicate that it is a resumed
7254 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7255 , but in the output.
7258 \begin_layout Standard
7259 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7267 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7276 \begin_layout Standard
7277 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7279 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7280 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7281 of a normal enumeration.
7282 There, insert the command
7285 \begin_layout Standard
7291 \begin_layout Standard
7296 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7300 \begin_layout Enumerate
7304 \begin_layout Enumerate
7308 \begin_layout Standard
7309 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7312 \begin_layout Enumerate
7313 \begin_inset Argument 1
7316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7332 This enumeration starts at 4
7335 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7337 \begin_inset Index idx
7340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7349 \begin_layout Standard
7350 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7352 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7355 \begin_layout Itemize
7359 \begin_layout Itemize
7360 with standard spacing
7363 \begin_layout Standard
7364 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7366 Add there the command
7370 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7373 \begin_layout Itemize
7374 \begin_inset Argument 1
7377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7396 \begin_layout Itemize
7400 \begin_layout Itemize
7404 \begin_layout Standard
7405 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7412 \begin_inset Index idx
7415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7423 For more information see its documentation,
7424 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7434 \begin_layout Standard
7435 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7437 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7438 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7439 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7442 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7445 \begin_layout Enumerate
7446 \begin_inset Argument 1
7449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7457 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7470 \begin_layout Enumerate
7471 with negative indentation
7474 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7475 Further Customization
7476 \begin_inset Index idx
7479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7480 Lists ! Customization
7488 \begin_layout Standard
7489 You can also change the style of description lists.
7493 \begin_layout Standard
7499 \begin_layout Standard
7500 changes the description label font, the command
7503 \begin_layout Standard
7509 \begin_layout Standard
7510 sets the list style.
7513 \begin_layout Standard
7514 An example where the command
7517 \begin_layout Standard
7522 itshape, style=nextline
7525 \begin_layout Standard
7529 \begin_layout Description
7531 \begin_inset space ~
7535 \begin_inset Argument 1
7538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7544 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7546 itshape, style=nextline
7556 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7557 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7561 \begin_layout Description
7563 \begin_inset space ~
7566 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7567 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7568 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7571 \begin_layout Standard
7572 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7578 \begin_inset Index idx
7581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7589 For more information see its documentation
7590 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7600 \begin_layout Subsection
7602 \begin_inset Index idx
7605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7614 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7616 \begin_inset space ~
7619 Address: An Overview
7622 \begin_layout Standard
7623 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7624 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7632 \begin_inset space ~
7638 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7639 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7640 gags on the document.
7641 In contrast, you can use the
7648 \begin_inset space ~
7653 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7654 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7658 \begin_layout Standard
7659 Of course, you're not limited to using
7666 \begin_inset space ~
7675 \begin_inset space ~
7680 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7681 some European academic papers.
7684 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7686 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7688 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7695 \begin_layout Standard
7700 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7701 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7705 \begin_inset space ~
7710 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7711 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7712 Here's an example of each:
7715 \begin_layout Right Address
7717 \begin_inset Newline newline
7721 \begin_inset Newline newline
7725 \begin_inset Newline newline
7728 When is it? What is today?
7731 \begin_layout Standard
7735 \begin_inset space ~
7741 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7743 the largest block of text on a single line.
7744 Here's an example of the
7751 \begin_layout Address
7753 \begin_inset Newline newline
7756 Where do I send this
7757 \begin_inset Newline newline
7760 Your post office and country
7763 \begin_layout Standard
7764 As you can see, both
7771 \begin_inset space ~
7776 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7781 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7782 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7788 This makes sense, since
7796 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7797 Thus, you have to use
7804 arg "newline-insert newline"
7809 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7810 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7812 \begin_inset space ~
7816 \begin_inset space ~
7821 ) to start a new line in an
7828 \begin_inset space ~
7836 \begin_layout Subsection
7840 \begin_layout Standard
7841 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7842 or list of references.
7844 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7847 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7849 \begin_inset Index idx
7852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7861 \begin_layout Standard
7866 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7867 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7868 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7869 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7883 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7884 The book document classes ignores the
7888 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7892 in a letter document class.
7895 \begin_layout Standard
7900 environment does several things for you.
7901 First, it puts the centered label
7902 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7906 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7910 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7912 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7913 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7914 the subsequent text.
7915 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7917 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7921 \begin_layout Standard
7922 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7926 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7927 The new paragraph will still be in the
7932 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7933 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7936 \begin_layout Standard
7937 \begin_inset Float figure
7944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7946 \begin_inset Graphics
7947 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7955 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7958 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7960 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7981 \begin_layout Standard
7982 We would love to demonstrate the
7986 environment, but since this document is in the
7987 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7991 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7994 class, we can't do this.
7995 We inserted it therefore as figure
7996 \begin_inset space ~
8000 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8002 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
8007 If you have never heard of an
8008 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8012 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8015 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
8018 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8020 \begin_inset Index idx
8023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8030 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8032 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
8039 \begin_layout Standard
8044 environment is used to list references.
8045 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
8046 only use it at the end of the document.
8058 \begin_layout Standard
8059 When you first open a
8063 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
8064 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
8065 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8069 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8073 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8077 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8080 depending on the document class.
8081 The heading is in a large boldface font.
8082 Each paragraph of the
8086 environment is a bibliography entry.
8091 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8092 Each new paragraph is still in the
8099 \begin_layout Standard
8100 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
8101 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
8103 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
8105 handling, have a look at section
8106 \begin_inset space ~
8110 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8112 reference "sec:Bibliography"
8119 \begin_layout Subsection
8120 Special Environments
8123 \begin_layout Standard
8125 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
8126 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
8129 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8134 \begin_inset Index idx
8137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8145 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8147 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
8154 \begin_layout Standard
8160 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
8162 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
8167 key as a fixed whitespace.
8171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8184 \begin_inset space ~
8189 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8207 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8210 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8213 arg "newline-insert newline"
8230 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8231 So, when you finish using the
8236 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8237 Also, you can nest the
8242 environment inside of others.
8245 \begin_layout Standard
8246 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8249 \begin_layout Itemize
8253 arg "newline-insert newline"
8256 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8257 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8261 \begin_inset space \space{}
8271 arg "newline-insert newline"
8277 \begin_layout Itemize
8281 arg "newline-insert newline"
8291 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8297 \begin_layout Itemize
8298 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8299 You must put at least one
8303 in any line you want blank.
8304 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8308 \begin_layout Itemize
8309 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8313 since that will insert
8318 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8321 arg "self-insert \""
8327 \begin_layout Standard
8331 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8335 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8339 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8343 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8347 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8348 printf("Hello World!
8353 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8357 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8361 \begin_layout Standard
8362 This is just the standard
8363 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8367 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8374 \begin_layout Standard
8380 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8382 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8383 as if you used a typewriter.
8384 \begin_inset Index idx
8387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8388 Paragraph environments|)
8393 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8396 Program Code Listings
8401 \begin_inset space ~
8409 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8413 \begin_inset Index idx
8416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8425 \begin_layout Standard
8430 environment is similar to the
8435 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8436 computer console text.
8441 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8455 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8456 you can have empty lines.
8469 \begin_layout Itemize
8470 have a certain language and a text style
8473 \begin_layout Itemize
8474 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8475 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8476 and \SpecialChar TeX
8480 \begin_layout Standard
8481 Because of these properties
8485 works like a typewriter.
8489 \begin_layout Verbatim
8493 \begin_layout Verbatim
8496 The following 2 lines are empty:
8499 \begin_layout Verbatim
8503 \begin_layout Verbatim
8507 \begin_layout Verbatim
8508 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8513 \begin_layout Standard
8518 environment is identical to
8522 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8523 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8530 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8534 \begin_layout Section
8535 Nesting Environments
8536 \begin_inset Index idx
8539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8540 Nesting ! Environments
8546 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8555 \begin_layout Subsection
8559 \begin_layout Standard
8561 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8563 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8565 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8567 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8569 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8573 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8579 \begin_layout Enumerate
8583 \begin_layout Enumerate
8588 \begin_layout Enumerate
8592 \begin_layout Enumerate
8597 \begin_layout Enumerate
8601 \begin_layout Standard
8602 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8603 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8605 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8607 \begin_inset space ~
8611 \begin_inset space ~
8619 \begin_inset space ~
8623 \begin_inset space ~
8628 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8630 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8633 arg "depth-increment"
8639 arg "depth-decrement"
8653 arg "depth-increment"
8659 arg "depth-decrement"
8663 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8664 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8668 \begin_layout Standard
8669 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8670 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8671 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8672 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8673 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8676 \begin_layout Standard
8677 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8679 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8681 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8684 \begin_layout Subsection
8685 What You Can and Can't Nest
8688 \begin_layout Standard
8689 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8690 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8693 \begin_layout Standard
8694 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8695 than a simple yes or no.
8696 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8699 \begin_layout Itemize
8700 Completely unnestable
8703 \begin_layout Itemize
8704 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8708 \begin_layout Itemize
8709 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8713 \begin_layout Standard
8714 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8715 environments have them:
8718 \begin_layout Description
8719 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8720 Can't nest into them.
8724 \begin_layout Itemize
8730 \begin_layout Itemize
8736 \begin_layout Itemize
8742 \begin_layout Itemize
8748 \begin_layout Itemize
8755 \begin_layout Description
8757 \begin_inset space ~
8760 Nestable You can nest them.
8761 You can nest other things into them.
8765 \begin_layout Itemize
8771 \begin_layout Itemize
8777 \begin_layout Itemize
8783 \begin_layout Itemize
8789 \begin_layout Itemize
8795 \begin_layout Itemize
8801 \begin_layout Itemize
8807 \begin_layout Itemize
8814 \begin_layout Itemize
8820 \begin_layout Itemize
8827 \begin_layout Description
8828 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8829 You can't nest anything into them.
8833 \begin_layout Itemize
8839 \begin_layout Itemize
8845 \begin_layout Itemize
8851 \begin_layout Itemize
8857 \begin_layout Itemize
8863 \begin_layout Itemize
8869 \begin_layout Itemize
8875 \begin_layout Itemize
8881 \begin_layout Itemize
8887 \begin_layout Itemize
8893 \begin_layout Itemize
8899 \begin_layout Itemize
8905 \begin_layout Itemize
8911 \begin_layout Itemize
8915 \begin_inset space ~
8921 \begin_layout Itemize
8928 \begin_layout Standard
8929 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8937 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8947 \begin_inset space ~
8950 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8951 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8952 nested section headings violate this.
8960 \begin_layout Subsection
8961 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8962 \begin_inset Index idx
8965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8966 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8974 \begin_layout Standard
8975 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8976 affected by nesting anyhow.
8980 \begin_layout Itemize
8984 \begin_layout Itemize
8988 \begin_layout Itemize
8992 \begin_layout Standard
8994 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9002 Figures and tables in
9006 are not affected by this.
9011 Have a look at section
9012 \begin_inset space ~
9016 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
9018 reference "sec:Floats"
9022 for more information about
9029 \begin_layout Standard
9031 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
9032 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
9036 \begin_layout Standard
9037 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
9038 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9042 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9045 of its own, it behaves just like a
9046 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9050 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9053 paragraph environment.
9054 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
9058 \begin_layout Standard
9059 Here's an example with a table:
9062 \begin_layout Enumerate
9067 \begin_layout Enumerate
9068 This is (a) and it's nested.
9072 \begin_layout Standard
9073 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9079 \begin_layout Standard
9081 \begin_inset Tabular
9082 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9083 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9084 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9085 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9105 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9143 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9169 \begin_layout Standard
9170 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9177 \begin_layout Enumerate
9179 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9183 \begin_layout Enumerate
9187 \begin_layout Standard
9188 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
9191 \begin_layout Enumerate
9196 \begin_layout Enumerate
9197 This is (a) and it's nested.
9201 \begin_layout Standard
9202 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9208 \begin_layout Standard
9210 \begin_inset Tabular
9211 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9212 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9213 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9214 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9216 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9298 \begin_layout Standard
9299 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9305 \begin_layout Enumerate
9312 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9315 \begin_layout Enumerate
9319 \begin_layout Standard
9320 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9324 \begin_layout Standard
9325 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9328 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9331 \begin_layout Enumerate
9336 \begin_layout Enumerate
9337 This is (a) and it's nested.
9340 \begin_layout Standard
9341 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9347 \begin_layout Standard
9349 \begin_inset Tabular
9350 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9351 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9352 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9353 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9355 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9373 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9393 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9438 \begin_layout Standard
9439 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9445 \begin_layout Enumerate
9447 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9454 \begin_layout Enumerate
9458 \begin_layout Standard
9459 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9465 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9466 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9470 \begin_layout Subsection
9471 Usage and General Features
9474 \begin_layout Standard
9475 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9476 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9478 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9482 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9485 is the innermost possible depth.
9486 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9489 \begin_layout Enumerate
9490 level #1 – outermost
9494 \begin_layout Enumerate
9499 \begin_layout Enumerate
9504 \begin_layout Enumerate
9509 \begin_layout Itemize
9514 \begin_layout Itemize
9523 \begin_layout Standard
9524 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9525 both of them in the example.
9526 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9536 For example, if we tried to nest another
9541 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9545 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9548 , we would get errors.
9551 \begin_layout Subsection
9553 \begin_inset Index idx
9556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9565 \begin_layout Standard
9566 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9567 We have several examples of nested environments.
9568 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9572 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9573 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9576 \begin_layout Labeling
9577 \labelwidthstring MMM
9578 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9587 \begin_layout Labeling
9588 \labelwidthstring MMM
9589 #2-a This is level #2.
9590 We created it by using
9593 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9599 arg "depth-increment"
9606 \begin_layout Labeling
9607 \labelwidthstring MMM
9608 #3-a This is level #3.
9609 This time, we just enter
9616 arg "depth-increment"
9620 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9624 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9630 arg "depth-increment"
9637 \begin_layout Standard
9642 environment, nested inside of
9643 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9647 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9651 So, it's at level #4.
9652 We did this by entering
9655 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9661 arg "depth-increment"
9664 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9669 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9685 \begin_layout Standard
9690 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9693 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9699 \begin_layout Labeling
9700 \labelwidthstring MMM
9701 #4-a This is level #4.
9705 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9708 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9713 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9717 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9722 keep nesting things inside
9723 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9727 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9734 \begin_layout Labeling
9735 \labelwidthstring MMM
9736 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9741 \begin_layout Labeling
9742 \labelwidthstring MMM
9743 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9744 and this is level #6.
9745 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9749 \begin_layout Labeling
9750 \labelwidthstring MMM
9751 #5-b Back to level #5.
9755 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9761 arg "depth-decrement"
9768 \begin_layout Labeling
9769 \labelwidthstring MMM
9773 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9779 arg "depth-decrement"
9782 , we're back at level #4.
9786 \begin_layout Labeling
9787 \labelwidthstring MMM
9788 #3-b Back to level #3.
9789 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9793 \begin_layout Labeling
9794 \labelwidthstring MMM
9795 #2-b Back to level #2.
9800 \begin_layout Labeling
9801 \labelwidthstring MMM
9802 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9803 After this sentence, we will enter
9807 and change the paragraph environment back to
9814 \begin_layout Standard
9815 We could have also used the
9831 environment in place of the
9836 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9839 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9840 Example 2: Inheritance
9843 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9844 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9847 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9856 arg "depth-increment"
9860 \begin_inset Newline newline
9863 which, we will change to the
9871 \begin_layout Enumerate
9876 environment, at level #2.
9879 \begin_layout Enumerate
9880 Notice how the nested
9884 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9888 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9892 \begin_layout Standard
9893 We ended this example by entering
9898 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9902 and reset the nesting depth by using
9905 arg "depth-decrement"
9911 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9912 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9921 \begin_inset Argument 1
9924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9925 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9933 \begin_layout Enumerate
9934 This is level #1, in an
9938 paragraph environment.
9939 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9943 \begin_layout Enumerate
9948 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9954 arg "depth-increment"
9958 Now, what happens if we nest an
9962 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9963 label be? An asterisk?
9967 \begin_layout Itemize
9977 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9978 So, its label is a bullet.
9979 (We got here by using
9982 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9988 arg "depth-increment"
9991 , then changing the environment to
9999 \begin_layout Itemize
10000 Here's level #4, produced using
10003 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10009 arg "depth-increment"
10013 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
10018 \begin_layout Enumerate
10020 to get to level #5.
10021 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
10026 Notice the type of numbering, it is
10030 , because we are in the
10038 environment (that is, it is an
10053 \begin_layout Enumerate
10058 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
10059 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
10063 \begin_layout Enumerate
10064 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
10067 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10070 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
10073 \begin_layout Enumerate
10077 arg "depth-decrement"
10080 to decrease the depth after the next
10083 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10090 \begin_layout Enumerate
10092 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
10097 \begin_layout Enumerate
10099 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
10100 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
10104 \begin_layout Enumerate
10105 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
10114 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
10119 reset the counter for the label.
10123 \begin_layout Enumerate
10127 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10133 arg "depth-decrement"
10136 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
10137 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
10138 into the twofold-nested
10146 \begin_layout Enumerate
10147 The same thing happens if we do another
10150 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10156 arg "depth-decrement"
10159 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
10162 \begin_layout Standard
10163 Lastly, we reset the environment to
10168 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10179 The number of other
10183 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10190 The same rule applies for the
10194 environment, as well.
10197 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10198 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10201 \begin_layout Enumerate
10202 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10203 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10204 the same detail with how we did it.
10213 \begin_layout Standard
10221 arg "depth-increment"
10228 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10229 the example in parentheses someplace.
10230 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10231 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10232 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10236 \begin_layout Enumerate
10241 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10245 \begin_layout Verse
10246 Now we will add verse.
10247 \begin_inset Newline newline
10250 It will get much worse.
10251 \begin_inset Newline newline
10261 arg "depth-increment"
10271 \begin_layout Verse
10272 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10273 \begin_inset Newline newline
10276 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10277 \begin_inset Newline newline
10283 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10291 \begin_layout Verse
10292 Here comes a table:
10296 \begin_layout Standard
10297 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10303 \begin_layout Standard
10305 \begin_inset Tabular
10306 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10307 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10308 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10309 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10311 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10329 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10349 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10394 \begin_layout Verse
10398 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10408 arg "depth-increment"
10414 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10420 \begin_inset Newline newline
10428 arg "depth-decrement"
10435 \begin_layout Enumerate
10440 : level #1) This is another item.
10441 Note that selecting a
10445 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10446 3 times to put the table inside the
10454 \begin_layout Quotation
10455 We're now ending the
10459 list and changing to
10464 We're still at level #1.
10465 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10466 The next set of paragraphs is a
10467 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10471 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10474 We will nest both the
10481 \begin_inset space ~
10486 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10490 for the letter body.
10494 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10497 to preserve the depth.
10498 Remember that you need to use
10501 arg "newline-insert newline"
10504 to create multiple lines inside the
10511 \begin_inset space ~
10521 \begin_layout Right Address
10523 \begin_inset Newline newline
10526 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10527 \begin_inset Newline newline
10533 \begin_layout Address
10535 \begin_inset space ~
10541 \begin_layout Quotation
10542 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10543 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10546 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10547 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10548 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10549 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10550 as soon as possible.
10551 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10554 \begin_layout Quotation
10555 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10556 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10557 with your order, along with payment.
10560 \begin_layout Quotation
10561 We thank you again for your patience.
10564 \begin_layout Address
10566 \begin_inset Newline newline
10573 \begin_layout Quotation
10574 That ends that example!
10577 \begin_layout Standard
10578 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10579 gives you a lot of power with just
10581 We could have easily nested an
10602 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10605 \begin_layout Subsection
10607 \begin_inset Index idx
10610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10611 Nesting ! Separation
10617 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10619 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10626 \begin_layout Standard
10627 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10629 For example you need two different enumerations:
10632 \begin_layout Enumerate
10637 \begin_layout Enumerate
10642 \begin_layout Enumerate
10646 \begin_layout Standard
10647 \begin_inset Separator plain
10653 \begin_layout Itemize
10659 \begin_layout Standard
10660 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10666 \begin_layout Enumerate
10670 \begin_layout Enumerate
10674 \begin_layout Enumerate
10678 \begin_layout Standard
10679 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10680 list item and use the menu
10682 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10683 Separated <Name> Above
10687 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10688 Separated <Name> Below
10691 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
10692 ) and before or behind it the
10694 Inside nested environments, it is also possible to split the outer environment.
10697 \begin_layout Standard
10698 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator
10699 (red arrow in LyX).
10700 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10701 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10704 \begin_layout Standard
10705 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10708 arg "paragraph-break"
10715 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10718 \begin_layout Section
10719 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10720 \begin_inset Index idx
10723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10732 \begin_layout Standard
10733 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10734 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10736 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10737 be broken at the end of a line.
10738 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10742 \begin_layout Subsection
10744 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10746 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10751 \begin_inset Index idx
10754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10763 \begin_layout Standard
10764 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10765 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10766 ) not to break the line at
10768 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10771 \begin_layout Quote
10772 Further documentation is given in section
10773 \begin_inset Newline newline
10777 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10779 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10787 \begin_layout Standard
10788 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10789 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10793 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10797 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10801 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10803 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10808 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10812 A protected space is set with
10814 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10815 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10817 \begin_inset space ~
10825 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10831 \begin_layout Subsection
10833 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10835 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10840 \begin_inset Index idx
10843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10844 Spacing ! Horizontal
10852 \begin_layout Standard
10853 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10855 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10856 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10860 The length units are listed in Appendix
10861 \begin_inset space ~
10865 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10867 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10874 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10876 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10878 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10883 \begin_inset Index idx
10886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10887 Spaces ! Inter-word
10895 \begin_layout Standard
10896 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10897 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10898 at the ends of sentences.
10899 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
10900 automatically takes care about this.
10901 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10902 followed by a period; see section
10903 \begin_inset space ~
10907 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10909 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10914 To insert a normal space, select
10916 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10917 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10919 \begin_inset space ~
10927 arg "space-insert normal"
10933 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10935 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10937 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10942 \begin_inset Index idx
10945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10954 \begin_layout Standard
10956 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10960 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10963 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10964 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10968 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10972 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10973 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10974 inside abbreviations:
10977 \begin_layout Quote
10979 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10983 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10986 \begin_layout Standard
10987 or between values and units.
10988 Compare for example this:
10989 \begin_inset Newline newline
10993 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10997 \begin_inset Newline newline
11000 10 kg (normal space
11003 \begin_layout Standard
11004 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
11006 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11007 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11009 \begin_inset space ~
11017 arg "space-insert thin"
11023 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11027 \begin_layout Standard
11028 You can also insert the following space types:
11031 \begin_layout Description
11033 \begin_inset space ~
11037 \begin_inset space ~
11040 space A line with a
11041 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11045 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
11049 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11052 negative thin space between the arrows.
11055 \begin_layout Description
11057 \begin_inset space ~
11061 \begin_inset space ~
11064 space A line with a
11065 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11069 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
11073 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11076 negative medium space between the arrows.
11079 \begin_layout Description
11081 \begin_inset space ~
11085 \begin_inset space ~
11088 space A line with a
11089 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11093 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
11097 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11100 negative thick space between the arrows.
11103 \begin_layout Description
11105 \begin_inset space ~
11109 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11113 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11117 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
11121 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11125 \begin_inset space ~
11129 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11132 em) space between the arrows.
11135 \begin_layout Description
11137 \begin_inset space ~
11141 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11145 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11149 \begin_inset space \quad{}
11153 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11157 \begin_inset space ~
11161 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11164 em) space between the arrows.
11167 \begin_layout Description
11169 \begin_inset space ~
11173 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11177 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11181 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11185 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11189 \begin_inset space ~
11193 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11196 em) space between the arrows.
11199 \begin_layout Description
11201 \begin_inset space ~
11205 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11209 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11214 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11218 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11221 cm space between the arrows.
11224 \begin_layout Standard
11226 \begin_inset space ~
11230 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11232 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11236 lists the different space sizes.
11239 \begin_layout Standard
11240 \begin_inset Float table
11247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11248 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11251 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11253 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11257 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
11265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11267 \begin_inset Tabular
11268 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
11269 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11270 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11271 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11273 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11284 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11297 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11306 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11311 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11321 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11330 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11335 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11345 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11359 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11378 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11383 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11387 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11391 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11401 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11410 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11415 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11425 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11434 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11439 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11449 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11454 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11462 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11467 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11477 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11482 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11490 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11495 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11505 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11510 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11518 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11523 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11544 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11546 \begin_inset Index idx
11549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11558 \begin_layout Standard
11559 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11560 feature for adding extra space
11561 in a uniform fashion.
11562 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11563 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11564 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11565 equally between themselves.
11568 \begin_layout Standard
11569 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11572 \begin_layout Quote
11574 This is on the left side
11575 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11578 This is on the right
11581 \begin_layout Quote
11584 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11588 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11594 \begin_layout Quote
11597 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11601 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11605 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11611 \begin_layout Standard
11612 That was an example in the
11618 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11622 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11626 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11629 is one in a standard paragraph.
11630 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11634 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11637 \begin_layout Standard
11638 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11641 \begin_inset space ~
11646 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11649 \begin_layout Standard
11651 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11655 \begin_inset space ~
11661 \begin_layout Standard
11663 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11667 \begin_inset space ~
11673 \begin_layout Standard
11675 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11679 \begin_inset space ~
11685 \begin_layout Standard
11687 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11691 \begin_inset space ~
11697 \begin_layout Standard
11699 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11703 \begin_inset space ~
11709 \begin_layout Standard
11711 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11715 \begin_inset space ~
11721 \begin_layout Standard
11722 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11730 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11734 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11736 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11737 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11741 option in the space dialog.
11749 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11751 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11753 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11758 \begin_inset Index idx
11761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11770 \begin_layout Standard
11771 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11772 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11775 \begin_layout Standard
11776 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11779 What is correct English?:
11780 \begin_inset Newline newline
11784 \begin_inset Newline newline
11788 \begin_inset space ~
11791 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11792 \begin_inset Newline newline
11796 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11807 \begin_inset Newline newline
11811 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11822 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11828 \begin_layout Standard
11830 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11831 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11835 \begin_inset space ~
11839 \begin_inset space ~
11843 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11847 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11849 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11850 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11854 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11856 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11860 \begin_inset space ~
11864 \begin_inset space ~
11868 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11871 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11872 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11876 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11880 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11881 That is why it is named
11882 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11886 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11890 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11891 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11895 \begin_layout Subsection
11897 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11899 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
11904 \begin_inset Index idx
11907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11916 \begin_layout Standard
11917 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11919 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11920 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11922 \begin_inset space ~
11928 There you find the following sizes:
11931 \begin_layout Standard
11944 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
11945 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11950 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11952 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
11953 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
11955 \begin_inset space ~
11961 \begin_inset Index idx
11964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11965 Document ! Settings
11970 for the paragraph separation.
11971 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11982 \begin_layout Standard
11988 \begin_inset Index idx
11991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11997 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11998 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
12003 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
12004 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
12013 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
12017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12022 s are described in section
12023 \begin_inset space ~
12027 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12029 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
12038 If there are several
12042 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
12043 You can therefore use
12047 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
12050 \begin_layout Standard
12055 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
12056 \begin_inset space ~
12060 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12062 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
12069 \begin_layout Standard
12070 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12080 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
12081 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
12093 \begin_layout Subsection
12094 Paragraph Alignment
12095 \begin_inset Index idx
12098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12099 Paragraph ! Alignment
12107 \begin_layout Standard
12108 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
12110 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
12113 dialog (toolbar button
12116 arg "layout-paragraph"
12120 There are five possibilities:
12123 \begin_layout Itemize
12131 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
12137 \begin_layout Itemize
12145 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
12151 \begin_layout Itemize
12159 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
12165 \begin_layout Itemize
12173 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
12179 \begin_layout Itemize
12187 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12193 \begin_layout Standard
12194 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12195 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12196 the left and right margins.
12197 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12200 \begin_layout Standard
12202 This paragraph is right aligned,
12205 \begin_layout Standard
12207 this one is centered,
12210 \begin_layout Standard
12212 this one is left aligned.
12215 \begin_layout Subsection
12217 \begin_inset Index idx
12220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12221 Page breaks ! Forced
12227 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12229 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12236 \begin_layout Standard
12237 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12238 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12239 force a page break where you want one.
12240 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12241 is good at page breaking.
12242 Only if you use a lot of
12246 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12247 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12250 \begin_layout Standard
12251 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12252 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12256 have to change the page breaking.
12259 \begin_layout Standard
12260 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12262 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12264 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12265 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12267 \begin_inset space ~
12273 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12275 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12276 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12278 \begin_inset space ~
12283 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12285 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12286 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12289 \begin_layout Standard
12290 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12291 at the top of a page.
12292 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12294 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12295 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12296 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12298 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12300 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12304 to learn more about
12311 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12313 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12315 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12320 \begin_inset Index idx
12323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12324 Page breaks ! Clear
12332 \begin_layout Standard
12333 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12334 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12335 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12336 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12337 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12340 \begin_layout Standard
12341 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12343 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12344 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12346 \begin_inset space ~
12352 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12354 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12355 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12357 \begin_inset space ~
12361 \begin_inset space ~
12366 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12367 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12370 \begin_layout Subsection
12372 \begin_inset Index idx
12375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12382 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12384 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12391 \begin_layout Standard
12392 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12394 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12396 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12397 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12399 \begin_inset space ~
12403 \begin_inset space ~
12411 arg "newline-insert newline"
12415 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12417 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12418 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12420 \begin_inset space ~
12424 \begin_inset space ~
12432 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12435 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12437 This is useful to avoid
12438 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12442 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12445 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12448 \begin_layout Standard
12449 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12450 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12452 very good at line breaking.
12453 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to set
12454 a line break actively, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12455 \begin_inset space ~
12459 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12461 reference "sec:Quote"
12466 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12468 reference "sec:Verse"
12473 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12475 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12482 \begin_layout Subsection
12484 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12486 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12491 \begin_inset Index idx
12494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12503 \begin_layout Standard
12505 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12516 \begin_layout Standard
12520 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12521 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12523 \begin_inset space ~
12528 you can insert horizontal lines.
12529 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12530 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12531 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12534 \begin_layout Standard
12536 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12547 \begin_layout Section
12548 Characters and Symbols
12551 \begin_layout Standard
12552 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12553 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12554 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12556 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12560 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12562 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12566 for information on how this is done.
12569 \begin_layout Standard
12570 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12575 dialog via the menu
12577 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12578 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12584 \begin_layout Standard
12585 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12593 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12594 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12596 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12604 \begin_layout Section
12605 Fonts and Text Styles
12606 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12608 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12615 \begin_layout Subsection
12617 \begin_inset Index idx
12620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12629 \begin_layout Standard
12630 There are two types of fonts:
12633 \begin_layout Description
12635 \begin_inset space ~
12639 \begin_inset Index idx
12642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12648 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12649 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12653 characters) in the font.
12654 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12655 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12656 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12657 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12658 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12659 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12660 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12661 \begin_inset Newline newline
12664 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12665 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12666 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12667 sizes than at small ones.
12668 \begin_inset Newline newline
12682 \begin_inset space ~
12690 \begin_layout Description
12692 \begin_inset space ~
12696 \begin_inset Index idx
12699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12705 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12706 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12707 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12708 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12709 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12710 image manipulation program.
12711 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12712 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12713 \begin_inset space ~
12716 pixels high up to 34
12717 \begin_inset space ~
12720 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12721 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12722 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12724 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12725 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12726 \begin_inset Newline newline
12729 Bitmap fonts are named
12732 \begin_inset space ~
12737 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12740 \begin_layout Standard
12741 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12742 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12743 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12744 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12745 use scalable fonts.
12748 \begin_layout Standard
12749 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12752 \begin_layout Standard
12753 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12755 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757415
12757 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757415
12760 styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12761 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12762 font to emphasize text, you use an
12763 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12767 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12771 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12773 In \SpecialChar LyX
12774 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12778 \begin_layout Subsection
12781 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12783 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12790 \begin_layout Standard
12791 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12792 used its own fonts.
12793 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12794 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12797 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12798 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12799 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12800 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12801 to a word processor.
12802 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12803 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12804 files are very portable across
12805 different machines.
12806 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12807 has increased a lot
12808 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12811 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12813 \begin_inset space ~
12817 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12819 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12824 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
12825 code in the document
12826 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12829 \begin_layout Standard
12830 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
12831 engines that are also able directly
12832 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12834 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12836 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12838 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12839 that is installed on your system.
12840 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12843 \begin_layout Standard
12844 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12852 In practice, some fonts might fail due to a legacy (non Unicode) font encoding,
12853 bad metrics, or other font deficiencies; so you might have to experiment.
12861 \begin_layout Subsection
12862 Document Font and Font size
12863 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12865 name "subsec:Document-Font"
12870 \begin_inset Index idx
12873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12880 \begin_inset Index idx
12883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12892 \begin_layout Standard
12893 You can set the document fonts in the
12895 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12899 \begin_inset Index idx
12902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12903 Document ! Settings
12913 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12914 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12917 \begin_inset space ~
12926 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12928 \begin_inset space ~
12931 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12934 \begin_layout Standard
12939 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12940 This requires that you use
12952 as the output format, i.
12953 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12957 \begin_inset space \space{}
12960 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12961 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12962 installed (see section
12963 \begin_inset space ~
12967 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12969 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12974 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
12976 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
12977 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
12979 \begin_inset space ~
12982 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
12983 cannot determine the family.
12984 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12985 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
12988 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12991 \begin_layout Standard
12992 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
12993 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
12998 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
13004 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
13006 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413696
13008 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413700
13011 font encoding, this is
13012 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413733
13013 , depending on the document language,
13016 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413747
13017 either the the standard \SpecialChar TeX
13019 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13025 \begin_inset space ~
13031 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13041 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413754
13042 the standard \SpecialChar TeX
13044 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13050 \begin_inset space ~
13056 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13064 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413756
13068 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13076 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13080 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13085 European Computer Modern
13088 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13096 However, some classes set different default fonts.
13099 \begin_layout Standard
13104 is a bitmap font, it looks pixelated in PDF output, especially when you
13105 read the PDF in a zoomed size.
13109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13110 This problem is less severe if you read PDFs in
13113 \begin_inset space ~
13118 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
13124 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
13125 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
13128 \begin_layout Itemize
13132 \begin_inset space ~
13137 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
13150 \begin_inset space ~
13155 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13156 community in order to replace
13160 as the default font.
13161 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
13162 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
13165 \begin_inset space ~
13178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13179 One difference is improved kerning.
13187 \begin_layout Itemize
13188 If you do not like the look of
13196 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
13197 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13201 \begin_inset space ~
13207 \begin_inset space ~
13217 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13218 \begin_inset space ~
13221 serif and typewriter fonts,
13225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13226 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13227 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13233 \begin_inset space ~
13242 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13243 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13247 \begin_inset space \space{}
13255 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13259 \begin_inset space \space{}
13265 \begin_inset space ~
13273 \begin_inset space ~
13283 but you can also select your own.
13284 \begin_inset Newline newline
13287 The differences between roman,
13290 \begin_inset space ~
13299 fonts are explained in section
13300 \begin_inset space ~
13304 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13306 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13311 \begin_inset Newline newline
13317 \begin_inset space ~
13322 was originally designed for newspapers.
13323 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13324 into the small newspaper columns.
13328 \begin_inset space ~
13333 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13336 \begin_layout Standard
13337 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13350 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13355 depends on the class you are using.
13356 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13359 \begin_layout Standard
13360 Note that the font size is the
13365 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13366 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13367 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13368 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13371 \begin_inset space ~
13377 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13378 \begin_inset space ~
13382 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13384 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13391 \begin_layout Standard
13395 \begin_inset space ~
13400 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13402 \begin_inset space ~
13405 serif or typewriter.
13410 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13420 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13423 \begin_layout Standard
13428 LaTeX font encoding
13430 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13431 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13437 \begin_inset Index idx
13440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13448 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413571
13450 \begin_inset space ~
13454 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13456 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13463 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13464 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13465 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413471
13469 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413474
13477 \begin_layout Standard
13478 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13480 Use Old Style Figures
13484 Use True Small Caps
13487 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13490 Use Old Style Figures
13492 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13494 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13495 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13499 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13502 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13506 Use True Small Caps
13508 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13509 of scaled capitals.
13510 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13511 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13512 \change_inserted -712698321 1563000270
13516 \begin_layout Standard
13518 \change_inserted -712698321 1563000448
13519 Furthermore, with some fonts, you can add additional (comma-separated) options
13520 provided by the font package (or the
13524 package, if you use non-TeX fonts), into the
13529 This presupposes that you are familiar with the respective \SpecialChar LaTeX
13535 \begin_layout Standard
13540 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13541 a font to display the script characters.
13545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13546 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13552 \begin_inset Index idx
13555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13562 So this has no effect for the document language
13578 \begin_layout Standard
13581 Enable micro-typographic extensions
13583 activates extensions such as character protrusion and font expansion via
13584 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13590 \begin_inset Index idx
13593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13595 packages ! microtype
13604 \begin_layout Standard
13607 Disallow line breaks after dashes
13609 outputs en- and em-dashes as literal characters
13613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13614 Or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13615 macro, if the literal character is not supported by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13621 instead of ligatures (--, ---) (see section
13622 \begin_inset space ~
13626 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13628 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
13638 \begin_layout Standard
13639 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13643 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13651 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13656 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13657 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13659 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13661 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13664 dialog, see section
13665 \begin_inset space ~
13669 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13671 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13683 \begin_layout Subsection
13687 \begin_layout Standard
13688 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
13689 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
13691 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
13692 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13693 choose a math font in the dialog
13695 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13699 \begin_inset Index idx
13702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13703 Document ! Settings
13709 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
13710 automatically selects a math font.
13711 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
13712 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
13715 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13721 \begin_inset space ~
13727 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13732 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
13733 document font is available.
13736 \begin_layout Standard
13737 Note that the math font will not be used for
13741 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13747 or by the insertion of the command
13754 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13755 \begin_inset space ~
13759 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13760 while the math characters do not.
13762 \begin_inset space ~
13765 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13768 \begin_inset space ~
13776 \begin_inset space ~
13781 in the document font settings.
13784 \begin_layout Standard
13785 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
13786 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
13787 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
13788 font (in most cases
13789 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13795 \begin_inset space ~
13801 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13804 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
13805 variant of the document's class default font (in most
13807 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13813 \begin_inset space ~
13819 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13825 \begin_layout Subsection
13827 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757119
13829 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757120
13833 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595783
13835 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13837 name "subsec:charstyles"
13844 \begin_inset Index idx
13847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13854 \begin_inset Index idx
13857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13866 \begin_layout Standard
13867 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
13868 automatically changes the
13869 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601052
13872 style for certain paragraph environments.
13874 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757169
13875 In this section, we will explain how the style of selected text passages
13877 This is where we meet the concept of
13883 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601099
13885 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601099
13889 \begin_layout Standard
13891 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595930
13896 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757160
13898 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757161
13911 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757189
13917 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13920 e., available with all document classes.
13921 On top of that, some document classes and modules provide
13925 for specific purposes.
13926 We describe both types of text styles in a minute.
13929 \begin_layout Standard
13931 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757201
13932 Before we do that, though, allow us just a few words of what we mean by
13942 Traditional word processors used to focus on so-called
13946 : if you wanted to emphasize a word, you selected it and chose e.
13947 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13952 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13956 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13959 — you customized the
13964 Modern processors, \SpecialChar LyX
13965 among them, encourage the use of
13977 instead (although formal markup is still possible; see section
13978 \begin_inset space ~
13982 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13984 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13989 Rather than fiddling with
13993 , they encourage the use of
13997 , who are defined with regard to their function (e.
13998 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14002 \begin_inset Quotes els
14006 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14009 ), not their form (
14010 \begin_inset Quotes els
14014 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14018 There are many advantages of the semantic approach.
14019 To begin with, using functional categories keeps you thinking about why
14020 you are actually marking up, if your markup is consistent and systematic,
14021 and whether this particular markup makes sense.
14022 On a more practical level, it is easy to change the appearance if needed.
14023 Consider the case when you are writing a paper and set all proper names
14029 Now if the publisher requests to have names appear differently (e.
14030 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14033 g., in normal font, or ALL-CAPS), you would have to change any single occurrence.
14034 With a semantic markup (such as
14038 ; see below), you'd just need to change the definition of
14043 It's a ten second change (if you know how to change the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14045 Moreover, semantic markup even allows you to produce different versions
14046 of a document, using different markup semantics.
14049 \begin_layout Standard
14051 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757213
14052 With that in mind, we now turn to the semantic text styles that are provided
14053 by \SpecialChar LyX
14059 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14061 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757220
14062 Builtin Text Styles
14063 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14065 name "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
14072 \begin_layout Standard
14074 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757226
14075 The two builtin text styles can be
14076 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596489
14080 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596491
14084 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596494
14085 both of these styles
14088 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596436
14096 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596045
14102 \begin_layout Standard
14107 style, do one of the following:
14110 \begin_layout Itemize
14111 click on the toolbar button
14120 \begin_layout Itemize
14121 use the key binding
14128 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596051
14132 \begin_layout Itemize
14134 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596318
14142 arg "dialog-show character"
14148 arg "dialog-show character"
14151 ) as described in section
14152 \begin_inset space ~
14156 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14158 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14167 \begin_layout Standard
14168 These commands are all toggles.
14173 style is already active, they deactivate it.
14176 \begin_layout Standard
14177 One typically uses the
14181 style for proper names.
14183 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14190 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
14192 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14196 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598183
14200 \begin_layout Standard
14202 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598323
14207 is producing text in
14211 , but the definition can be changed.
14216 \begin_layout Standard
14218 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757229
14220 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757229
14228 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
14235 \begin_layout Itemize
14236 clicking on the toolbar button
14245 \begin_layout Itemize
14246 using the keybindings
14253 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596078
14257 \begin_layout Itemize
14259 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596340
14267 arg "dialog-show character"
14273 arg "dialog-show character"
14276 ) as described in section
14277 \begin_inset space ~
14281 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14283 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14292 \begin_layout Standard
14297 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
14299 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598370
14301 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598370
14304 packages use a different font
14305 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598396
14306 , and you can also customize it yourself by changing the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14312 \begin_layout Standard
14313 We've been using the
14317 style all over the place in this document.
14318 Here's one more example:
14321 \begin_layout Quotation
14325 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757231
14327 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757231
14333 \begin_layout Standard
14334 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
14335 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
14336 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
14337 the common tendency to overuse
14338 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757236
14340 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757236
14345 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598419
14349 \begin_layout Standard
14351 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757709
14352 In contrast to the custom text styles, the builtin styles are represented
14353 only as font changes and integrated in the
14361 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598525
14364 always reset to the default font using the key binding
14371 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598540
14373 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598540
14377 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596565
14380 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14382 \begin_inset space ~
14385 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14387 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598544
14393 arg "dialog-show character"
14399 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598549
14401 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598549
14407 arg "dialog-show character"
14411 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596575
14415 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14417 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756578
14419 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14421 name "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
14428 \begin_layout Standard
14430 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757241
14431 Custom text styles can be provided by the document class, a module (see
14433 \begin_inset space ~
14437 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14439 reference "subsec:Modules"
14446 ), or local layout settings (see section
14447 \begin_inset space ~
14451 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14453 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
14458 As the two builtin styles, they provide
14462 markup for specific functions.
14463 For instance, \SpecialChar LyX
14468 module that provides, among other things, some custom text styles to markup
14478 \begin_inset Quotes els
14482 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14488 \begin_layout Standard
14490 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757806
14491 These styles can be found, if available, in the
14493 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14499 \begin_layout Standard
14501 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757245
14502 For the purpose of demonstration, we have loaded in this document the optional
14507 that replicates and extends the two builtin styles.
14508 By example of the emphasized style, we can see the differences in look
14509 and feel (although the result in the typeset output is the same): while
14514 appears as normal font change, the custom text style
14515 \begin_inset Flex Emph
14518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14520 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599318
14528 appears as an inset, with a label below that identifies its semantics.
14529 This is the way all custom text styles look and feel like.
14530 For instance, the three others from the module we have loaded are:
14531 \begin_inset Flex Code
14534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14536 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599387
14545 \begin_inset Flex Strong
14548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14550 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599390
14559 \begin_inset Flex Noun
14562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14564 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599392
14573 Note that custom text styles might (as in the example) or might not emulate
14574 on screen their formal appearance.
14579 \begin_layout Subsection
14581 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599470
14583 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599472
14587 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599462
14593 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756524
14595 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756526
14601 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599485
14603 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599485
14607 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14609 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14614 \begin_inset Index idx
14617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14626 \begin_layout Standard
14627 There are always occasions when you will need to do some
14628 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599505
14631 fine-tuning; so \SpecialChar LyX
14633 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595143
14635 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595144
14639 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601741
14640 the properties of text passages
14641 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595163
14645 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
14646 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
14647 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
14648 from ordinary dialog.
14649 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595231
14653 \begin_layout Standard
14655 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757255
14656 If there are no custom text styles provided by the document class or a module
14657 for this purpose (which is, as written above, generally the better way
14658 of handling such issues), you often find yourself wanting to quickly tweak
14659 the properties of the respective text passages.
14664 comes in as a last resort.
14669 \begin_layout Standard
14670 Before we document how to
14671 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599696
14672 use custom character style
14673 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599700
14674 tweak the text properties
14676 , we want to issue a warning yet again: Don't overuse
14677 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599715
14679 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599716
14683 \begin_inset Newline newline
14686 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
14687 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
14690 \begin_layout Standard
14692 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599736
14693 use custom character styles
14694 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599739
14695 tweak text properties
14698 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599762
14701 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14703 \begin_inset space ~
14706 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14708 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599762
14714 arg "dialog-show character"
14719 dialog or press the toolbar button
14722 arg "dialog-show character"
14727 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599782
14730 boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
14731 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599798
14733 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599796
14736 property that you can choose.
14737 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
14740 \begin_inset space ~
14745 , which keeps the current state of that property.
14747 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677079
14751 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677076
14753 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677077
14758 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
14759 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
14760 environments all at once.
14763 \begin_layout Standard
14765 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599868
14767 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599869
14770 properties, and their options (in addition to
14773 \begin_inset space ~
14779 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677094
14783 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677096
14791 \begin_layout Labeling
14792 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14798 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14802 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14806 The possible options are:
14810 \begin_layout Labeling
14811 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14816 This is the Roman font family.
14817 Normally a serif font.
14818 It's also the default family.
14828 \begin_layout Labeling
14829 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14833 \begin_inset space ~
14840 This is the Sans Serif font family.
14852 \begin_layout Labeling
14853 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14860 This is the Typewriter font family.
14866 arg "font-typewriter"
14872 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607448
14876 \begin_layout Standard
14878 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607495
14879 The general differences of these families are:
14882 \begin_layout Itemize
14884 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607451
14889 fonts use characters with serifs.
14890 These are the small
14891 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14895 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14898 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
14899 The following example shows the difference:
14900 \begin_inset Newline newline
14904 \begin_inset Newline newline
14909 text without serifs
14912 \begin_inset Newline newline
14915 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
14916 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
14923 \begin_layout Itemize
14925 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
14930 is not recommended for use as a base type.
14931 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
14932 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
14935 \begin_layout Itemize
14937 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
14943 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14947 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14950 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14951 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14955 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14959 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14963 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14968 \begin_inset Newline newline
14972 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14977 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
14988 \begin_inset Note Note
14991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14993 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
14994 For more on phantoms see section
14995 \begin_inset space ~
14999 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15001 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
15011 \begin_inset Newline newline
15020 \begin_layout Labeling
15021 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15026 This corresponds to the print weight.
15031 \begin_layout Labeling
15032 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15037 This is the Medium font series.
15038 It's also the default series.
15041 \begin_layout Labeling
15042 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15049 This is the Bold font series.
15062 \begin_layout Labeling
15063 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15068 As the name implies.
15073 \begin_layout Labeling
15074 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15079 This is the Upright font shape.
15080 It's also the default shape.
15083 \begin_layout Labeling
15084 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15094 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599902
15099 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599902
15104 s the Italic font shape
15110 \begin_layout Labeling
15111 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15118 This is the Slanted font shape
15120 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
15121 , this is different from italic).
15124 \begin_layout Labeling
15125 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15129 \begin_inset space ~
15136 This is the Small caps font shape
15143 \begin_layout Labeling
15144 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15149 Alters the text color.
15150 Note that not all DVI
15151 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599925
15153 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599925
15156 viewers are able to display colors.
15158 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599934
15162 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599939
15164 \begin_inset space ~
15171 , which means that the document default color set in
15173 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15174 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
15180 \begin_inset space ~
15186 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599960
15188 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599960
15192 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599974
15272 \begin_inset Index idx
15275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15284 \begin_layout Labeling
15285 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15290 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
15291 the language of the document.
15292 Text marked in this way will be underlined
15293 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600006
15294 in the \SpecialChar LyX
15297 in blue to indicate the change
15298 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600002
15299 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
15303 \begin_inset Newline newline
15306 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
15308 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
15309 When using the spell checking (see section
15310 \begin_inset space ~
15314 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15316 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
15320 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
15321 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677618
15323 \begin_inset Newline newline
15326 If you do not want text passages to be spellchecked, activate
15328 Exclude from Spellchecking
15331 Passages marked like this will still be hyphenated correctly.
15334 \begin_layout Labeling
15335 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15340 Alters the size of the font.
15342 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600033
15344 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600034
15348 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600037
15351 numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually proportional to the
15352 document font size.
15353 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
15354 the details, but a general description of what
15360 \begin_layout Labeling
15361 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15369 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15373 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15382 arg "font-size tiny"
15388 \begin_layout Labeling
15389 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15397 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15401 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15410 arg "font-size scriptsize"
15416 \begin_layout Labeling
15417 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15425 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15429 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15438 arg "font-size footnotesize"
15444 \begin_layout Labeling
15445 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15453 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15457 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15466 arg "font-size small"
15472 \begin_layout Labeling
15473 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15479 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15483 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15487 It's also the default size.
15491 arg "font-size normal"
15497 \begin_layout Labeling
15498 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15506 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15510 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15519 arg "font-size large"
15525 \begin_layout Labeling
15526 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15534 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15538 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15547 arg "font-size larger"
15553 \begin_layout Labeling
15554 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15562 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15566 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15575 arg "font-size largest"
15581 \begin_layout Labeling
15582 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15590 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15594 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15603 arg "font-size huge"
15609 \begin_layout Labeling
15610 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15618 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15622 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15631 arg "font-size giant"
15637 \begin_layout Labeling
15638 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15643 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
15644 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15648 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15652 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15656 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15663 arg "font-size increase"
15669 \begin_layout Labeling
15670 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15675 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
15676 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15680 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15684 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15688 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15695 arg "font-size decrease"
15702 \begin_layout Standard
15707 : don't go crazy with this feature.
15708 You should almost never need to change the font size.
15710 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
15711 — use those instead.
15712 This is here for fine-tuning only!
15715 \begin_layout Labeling
15716 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15718 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600062
15722 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600065
15728 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600102
15729 change a few other things at the character level
15730 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600112
15731 have text passages being underlined
15735 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600240
15736 Avoid using underlining if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter
15737 days, when you could not change fonts.
15738 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
15739 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
15740 because some people
15744 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
15751 \begin_layout Labeling
15752 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15754 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600074
15761 This is text with emphasize on
15764 This might seem like the same as
15768 , but it is actually a bit different.
15774 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
15776 Normally this font is equal to italic.
15777 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600322
15781 \begin_layout Labeling
15782 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15784 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600337
15789 Don't use underlining.
15794 \begin_layout Labeling
15795 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15797 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600192
15801 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600193
15809 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600212
15811 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600209
15820 arg "font-underline"
15826 \begin_inset Newline newline
15830 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600236
15833 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
15834 when you could not change fonts.
15835 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
15836 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
15837 because some people
15841 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
15846 \begin_layout Labeling
15847 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15851 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600261
15853 \begin_inset space ~
15862 This is text with Double under
15863 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600270
15865 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600271
15874 arg "font-underunderline"
15878 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600282
15880 \begin_inset Newline newline
15883 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
15884 about double underbar
15889 \begin_layout Labeling
15890 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15894 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600285
15896 \begin_inset space ~
15905 This is text with Wavy under
15906 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600294
15908 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600295
15917 arg "font-underwave"
15921 \begin_inset Newline newline
15924 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
15925 Keep antinausea pills handy.
15926 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600130
15931 \begin_layout Labeling
15932 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15934 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600169
15939 lets you strike-through text passages in two ways:
15945 \begin_layout Labeling
15946 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15948 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600364
15953 Don't use strikethrough.
15956 \begin_layout Labeling
15957 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15961 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600378
15963 \begin_inset space ~
15967 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600378
15975 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600382
15977 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601925
15978 Single strikethrough
15986 arg "font-strikeout"
15990 \begin_inset Newline newline
15993 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
15994 changed in the meantime.
15997 \begin_layout Labeling
15998 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16000 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600394
16004 \begin_inset space ~
16008 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600397
16010 \begin_inset space ~
16014 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600398
16022 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601941
16024 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601943
16030 \begin_inset Newline newline
16033 This is used to make text hardly readable.
16037 \begin_layout Standard
16039 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757268
16040 In addition to all the formal markup described above, the dialog also provides
16041 you access to the two builtin semantic text styles (see section
16042 \begin_inset space ~
16046 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16048 reference "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
16055 \begin_layout Itemize
16057 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600579
16064 This is text with emphasize on
16069 \begin_layout Itemize
16073 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600548
16080 This is text with Noun on.
16082 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600637
16089 , this is a logical attribute.
16090 Normally it's equivalent to
16093 \begin_inset space ~
16103 \begin_layout Standard
16104 So you have a huge number of combinations to
16105 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600660
16107 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600660
16112 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600674
16113 chosen a new character style
16114 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600725
16115 applied a text property
16118 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600703
16121 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
16123 \begin_inset space ~
16126 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
16128 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600703
16134 arg "dialog-show character"
16142 arg "dialog-show character"
16145 ) dialog, the settings are
16146 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600733
16150 You can activate the
16151 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600738
16153 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600745
16154 last applied properties
16156 by using the toolbar button
16159 arg "textstyle-apply"
16163 The button lets you apply
16164 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600766
16165 your custom character style
16166 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600778
16169 even when the dialog isn't visible.
16171 \change_inserted -712698321 1545905101
16172 A press on the button will apply the most recent setting again, a press
16173 on the down-arrow will open a menu with the (max.
16174 20) most recently applied settings, from which you can select one.
16179 \begin_layout Standard
16180 To completely reset the
16181 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600787
16183 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600823
16184 text properties of a selection
16186 to the default, use
16187 \change_inserted -712698321 1545917704
16189 \change_deleted -712698321 1545917700
16199 \change_inserted -712698321 1545917733
16204 from the menu of the toolbar button
16207 arg "textstyle-apply"
16214 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600803
16215 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed (suppose
16216 you just set the shape to
16217 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16221 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16225 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16229 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16235 \begin_inset space ~
16249 \begin_layout Standard
16251 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16252 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
16260 \begin_inset space ~
16272 \begin_layout Itemize
16274 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16280 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16284 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16287 font, which means every character has the same width; the
16288 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16292 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16296 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16300 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16305 \begin_inset Newline newline
16309 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
16312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16323 \begin_inset Note Note
16326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16327 For more on phantoms see section
16328 \begin_inset space ~
16332 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16334 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
16344 \begin_inset Newline newline
16350 \begin_layout Itemize
16352 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16357 fonts use characters with serifs.
16358 These are the small
16359 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16363 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16366 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
16367 The following example shows the difference:
16368 \begin_inset Newline newline
16372 \begin_inset Newline newline
16377 text without serifs
16380 \begin_inset Newline newline
16383 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
16384 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
16391 \begin_layout Itemize
16393 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16398 is not recommended for use as a base type.
16399 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
16400 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
16405 \begin_layout Standard
16407 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600873
16408 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16412 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16415 refers to applying or removing font properties.
16416 When a property is marked for toggling in the
16419 \begin_inset space ~
16424 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
16425 the property to be removed.
16426 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
16427 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
16428 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
16431 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16435 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16439 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16443 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16446 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
16447 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
16448 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16452 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16455 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
16459 \begin_inset space ~
16464 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
16467 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16471 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16475 If you, for example, set
16476 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16480 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16484 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16488 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16494 \begin_inset space ~
16499 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
16501 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16505 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16508 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
16513 \begin_layout Standard
16515 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607667
16518 with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts! They are, more
16519 often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
16522 \begin_layout Section
16523 Printing and Previewing
16526 \begin_layout Subsection
16530 \begin_layout Standard
16531 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
16532 using \SpecialChar LyX
16533 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
16534 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
16535 goes on behind-the-scenes.
16536 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
16538 Additional Features
16543 \begin_layout Standard
16545 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
16548 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
16549 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
16550 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16553 is what you use to do your actual writing.
16554 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
16555 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16556 to turn your writing into printable output.
16557 This happens in two stages:
16560 \begin_layout Enumerate
16561 First, \SpecialChar LyX
16562 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
16564 a file with the extension,
16565 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16573 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16579 \begin_layout Enumerate
16580 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
16581 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16582 to use the commands in the
16586 file to produce printable output.
16589 \begin_layout Subsection
16590 Output file formats
16591 \begin_inset Index idx
16594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16601 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16603 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
16610 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16611 Simple text (ASCII)
16612 \begin_inset Index idx
16615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16616 File formats ! ASCII
16624 \begin_layout Standard
16625 This file type has the extension
16626 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16634 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16638 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
16639 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16642 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
16643 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16649 \begin_layout Standard
16650 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
16652 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16653 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16655 \begin_inset space ~
16661 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
16662 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
16663 bibliography (section
16664 \begin_inset space ~
16668 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16670 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
16675 If your document includes such material, use
16677 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16678 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16680 \begin_inset space ~
16684 \begin_inset space ~
16688 \begin_inset space ~
16696 \begin_inset space ~
16700 \begin_inset space ~
16706 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
16707 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
16710 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16713 \begin_inset Index idx
16716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16717 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
16726 \begin_layout Standard
16727 This file type has the extension
16728 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16736 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16739 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16742 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
16743 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
16744 -Errors or to process it manually
16745 with console commands.
16746 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
16747 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
16748 's temporary directory whenever you
16749 view or export your document.
16752 \begin_layout Standard
16753 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
16754 -file using the menu
16756 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16757 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16761 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
16762 export variants are explained in section
16763 \begin_inset space ~
16767 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16769 reference "subsec:Export"
16776 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16778 \begin_inset Index idx
16781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16790 \begin_layout Standard
16791 This file type has the extension
16792 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16800 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16805 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16809 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16812 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
16813 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
16814 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
16818 \begin_layout Standard
16819 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
16820 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
16821 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
16822 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
16823 when you view the DVI.
16824 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
16827 \begin_layout Standard
16828 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
16830 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16831 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16836 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16837 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16839 \begin_inset space ~
16845 The latter option uses the program
16847 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16853 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16856 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
16857 font access (see section
16858 \begin_inset space ~
16862 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16864 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
16869 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16870 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
16875 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16877 \begin_inset Index idx
16880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16881 File formats ! PostScript
16889 \begin_layout Standard
16890 This file type has the extension
16891 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16899 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16903 PostScript was developed by the company
16907 as a printer language.
16908 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
16910 PostScript can be seen as a
16911 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16914 programming language
16915 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16918 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
16922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16923 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16930 \begin_inset Index idx
16933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16935 packages ! pstricks
16945 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
16948 \begin_layout Standard
16949 PostScript can only contain images in the format
16950 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16953 Encapsulated PostScript
16954 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16957 (EPS, file extension
16958 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16966 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16970 As \SpecialChar LyX
16971 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
16972 convert them in the background to EPS.
16973 If, for example, you have 50
16974 \begin_inset space ~
16977 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
16979 \begin_inset space ~
16982 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
16983 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
16985 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
16986 EPS to avoid this problem.
16989 \begin_layout Standard
16990 You can export to PostScript using the menu
16992 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16993 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16999 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17001 \begin_inset Index idx
17004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17011 \begin_inset Index idx
17014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17023 \begin_layout Standard
17024 This file type has the extension
17025 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17033 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17038 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17041 Portable Document Format
17042 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17049 was derived from PostScript.
17050 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
17052 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17056 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17059 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
17060 looks exactly the same.
17063 \begin_layout Standard
17064 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
17065 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17068 Joint Photographic Experts Group
17069 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17072 (JPG, file extension
17073 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17081 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17085 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17093 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17097 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17100 Portable Network Graphics
17101 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17104 (PNG, file extension
17105 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17113 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17117 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
17118 converts them in the
17119 background to one of these formats.
17120 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
17121 will slow down your workflow.
17122 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
17125 \begin_layout Standard
17126 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
17128 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17134 \begin_layout Description
17136 \begin_inset space ~
17139 (pdflatex) This uses the program
17143 which converts your file directly to PDF.
17146 \begin_layout Description
17148 \begin_inset space ~
17155 ) This uses the program
17157 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17160 which converts your file directly to PDF.
17163 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17166 is a new engine, derived from
17170 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
17171 access (see section
17172 \begin_inset space ~
17176 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17178 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17183 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17184 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
17189 \begin_layout Description
17191 \begin_inset space ~
17198 ) This uses the program
17203 that converts your file directly to PDF.
17209 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
17210 font access (see section
17211 \begin_inset space ~
17215 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17217 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17222 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
17223 vertically written Japanese.
17226 \begin_layout Description
17228 \begin_inset space ~
17231 (cropped) This is the same as
17234 \begin_inset space ~
17239 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
17240 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
17241 to generate good-looking
17242 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
17245 \begin_layout Description
17247 \begin_inset space ~
17250 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
17254 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
17258 \begin_layout Description
17260 \begin_inset space ~
17263 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
17267 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
17268 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
17272 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
17273 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
17276 \begin_layout Standard
17280 \begin_inset space ~
17289 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
17290 works without problems.
17291 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
17292 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
17296 \begin_inset space ~
17304 \begin_inset space ~
17309 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
17317 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17319 \begin_inset Index idx
17322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17323 FileFormats ! XHTML
17329 \begin_inset Index idx
17332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17341 \begin_layout Standard
17342 This file type has the extension
17343 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17351 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17355 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
17356 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
17357 When \SpecialChar LyX
17358 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
17359 suitable for the purpose.
17360 For the math output you can choose in the menu
17362 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17363 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
17366 between different formats, which are described in section
17368 Math Output in XHTML
17373 \begin_inset space ~
17381 \begin_layout Standard
17382 XHTML output remains
17383 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17387 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17390 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
17391 features are supported yet.
17395 and the World Wide Web
17399 Additional Features
17401 manual, for more information.
17404 \begin_layout Standard
17405 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
17407 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17408 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17414 \begin_layout Subsection
17416 \begin_inset Index idx
17419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17428 \begin_layout Standard
17429 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
17430 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
17439 or use the toolbar button
17446 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
17447 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see section
17448 \begin_inset space ~
17452 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17454 reference "sec:File-Formats"
17458 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
17460 \begin_inset space ~
17464 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17466 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
17471 Further output formats can be selected via
17473 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17474 View (Other Formats)
17476 or the toolbar button
17485 \begin_layout Standard
17486 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
17487 viewer window using the menu
17489 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17494 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17495 Update (Other Formats)
17500 \begin_layout Standard
17501 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
17504 To have a real output, export your document.
17507 \begin_layout Section
17508 A few Words about Typography
17509 \begin_inset Index idx
17512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17521 \begin_layout Subsection
17522 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
17523 \begin_inset Index idx
17526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17533 \begin_inset Index idx
17536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17545 \begin_layout Standard
17546 In \SpecialChar LyX
17548 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17556 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17559 symbol comes in four variants: the
17576 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
17582 \begin_layout Standard
17583 \begin_inset Box Frameless
17593 height_special "totalheight"
17598 backgroundcolor "none"
17601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17602 \begin_inset Tabular
17603 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
17604 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
17605 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
17606 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17607 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17608 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17609 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
17612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17618 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
17621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17627 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
17630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17637 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17638 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17647 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17656 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17660 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17668 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17677 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17678 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17696 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17700 system key combination
17704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17705 On Mac and Linux, the en dash is entered with
17708 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17712 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17717 and the em dash with
17720 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17724 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17733 is the Mac label for the right
17744 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17748 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17757 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17758 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17767 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17776 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17780 system key combination or
17781 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17785 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17795 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17804 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17808 \begin_inset Formula $-$
17816 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17820 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17828 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17847 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
17853 \begin_layout Standard
17854 Dashes can also be inserted with
17856 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17858 \begin_inset space ~
17861 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
17869 function with the Unicode code point as argument (2013 for the em dash
17870 and 2014 for the en dash).
17873 \begin_layout Standard
17874 Hyphen and dashes are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in math
17875 mode and has a length of its own.
17876 Here are some examples:
17879 \begin_layout Enumerate
17880 line- and page-breaks
17881 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
17891 \begin_layout Enumerate
17893 \begin_inset space ~
17897 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
17907 \begin_layout Enumerate
17908 The em dash is used without spaces: Oh—there's a dash.
17909 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
17919 \begin_layout Enumerate
17920 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
17924 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
17934 \begin_layout Standard
17936 \begin_inset CommandInset href
17938 name "Wikipedia entry on dashes"
17939 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dash"
17947 \begin_layout Subsection
17948 Dashes and Line Breaks
17949 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17951 name "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
17958 \begin_layout Standard
17959 Whether line breaks before or after dashes are allowed depends on the use
17960 case and locale, e.
17961 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17967 \begin_layout Itemize
17968 In English, line breaks are generally allowed after the dash, but no line
17969 break should occur if only a single character follows the dash (as in A–Z).
17972 \begin_layout Itemize
17973 In English, dashes used to set off parenthetical statements should not start
17977 \begin_layout Itemize
17978 In French and Spanish, dashes around parenthetical statements are treated
17979 similar to brackets: line breaks are not allowed on the inner side.
17982 \begin_layout Standard
17983 By default, dashes are output by \SpecialChar LyX
17984 to \SpecialChar LaTeX
17986 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17990 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17995 allows line breaks after hyphens
17996 \change_deleted -1402925745 1558782973
17998 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782983
18001 en-dashes and em-dashes.
18004 \begin_layout Enumerate
18005 Line breaks before spaced en dashes
18006 \begin_inset space ~
18009 – common in British English and generally recommended by
18011 The Elements of Typographic Style
18014 \begin_inset space ~
18017 – can be prevented using protected spaces.
18020 \begin_layout Enumerate
18021 Unwanted line breaks
18026 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782702
18028 \change_deleted -1402925745 1558782715
18031 be prevented by wrapping in a makebox
18035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18038 Prevent Hyphenation
18043 \begin_inset space ~
18059 in \SpecialChar TeX
18061 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782753
18062 , a protected space does not suffice
18066 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782332
18071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18073 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782431
18074 It is generally recommended to set the correct language for text parts not
18075 in the document language.
18076 We don't do this here to prevent a dependency on LaTeX support for French
18090 \begin_layout Itemize
18092 \begin_inset space ~
18096 \begin_inset Box Frameless
18106 height_special "totalheight"
18111 backgroundcolor "none"
18114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18123 \begin_layout Itemize
18125 \begin_inset Box Frameless
18135 height_special "totalheight"
18140 backgroundcolor "none"
18143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18145 \begin_inset space ~
18153 si tout le monde ne les aime pas
18154 \begin_inset space ~
18157 – sont très utiles.
18160 \begin_layout Itemize
18165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18174 —un inciso con rayas— se escribe así.
18178 \begin_layout Standard
18179 An incorrect line break is easily overlooked because
18180 \begin_inset space ~
18183 – in contrast to an overfull line
18184 \begin_inset space ~
18187 – it does not trigger a warning in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18191 \begin_layout Standard
18192 If you want to globally disable line breaks after dashes, you can select
18195 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18196 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18197 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
18198 Disallow line breaks after dashes
18203 \begin_layout Enumerate
18204 Line breaks are still allowed after spaced dashes.
18205 They can be prevented using protected spaces (without need for a makebox
18206 or \SpecialChar TeX
18212 \begin_layout Itemize
18214 \begin_inset space ~
18217 même si tout le monde ne les aime pas
18218 \begin_inset space ~
18221 – sont très utiles.
18225 \begin_layout Enumerate
18226 Line breaks after unspaced dashes can be allowed via the menu
18227 \begin_inset Newline newline
18232 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18233 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18235 \change_deleted 1675569489 1580913043
18237 \change_inserted 1675569489 1580913043
18239 \begin_inset space ~
18245 \change_deleted 1675569489 1580913068
18247 \change_inserted 1675569489 1580913068
18249 \begin_inset space ~
18260 \begin_layout Itemize
18261 Em-dashes without spaces—\SpecialChar allowbreak
18262 common in American English—\SpecialChar allowbreak
18263 should be followed by
18264 a line break opportunity.
18267 \begin_layout Standard
18268 This also allows hyphenation of the word following the dash (see section
18269 \begin_inset space ~
18273 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18275 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
18286 \begin_layout Enumerate
18287 With this setting, \SpecialChar LaTeX
18288 hyphenates words also if immediately followed by em
18289 or en dashes (see section
18290 \begin_inset space ~
18294 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18296 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
18306 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18307 Changes and backwards compatibility
18310 \begin_layout Standard
18311 Up to \SpecialChar LyX
18313 \begin_inset space ~
18316 2.1, consecutive hyphen characters (-- and ---) in the LyX source were merged
18317 to en or em dashes by LaTeX.
18319 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18323 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18326 retain the line-break properties of hyphens while literal dash characters
18327 are regarded by \SpecialChar LaTeX
18335 \begin_layout Standard
18336 Since \SpecialChar LyX
18338 \begin_inset space ~
18341 2.2, consecutive hyphens in the LyX source are exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18343 prevents ligation to dashes.
18345 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18349 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18352 in documents from earlier versions are converted to literal dash characters
18357 font); typed in consecutive hyphens are merged to dash characters immediately
18358 after the input (unless the current text font is
18366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18367 The behavior was changed since
18368 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18372 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18376 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18380 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18383 in PDF, Postscript, and DVI output.
18384 An unintended consequence of these changes was that all dashes were output
18385 as non-breakable dashes.
18386 This also resulted in changed line breaks in some older documents.
18395 \begin_layout Standard
18398 \begin_inset space ~
18406 When opening documents edited with \SpecialChar LyX
18408 \begin_inset space ~
18411 2.2 or earlier and containing literal dash characters not followed by whitespace,
18414 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18415 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18416 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
18417 Disallow line breaks after dashes
18419 is active to prevent changes to the line breaks.
18423 If you used both literal and
18424 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18428 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18431 dashes in pre-\SpecialChar LyX
18433 \begin_inset space ~
18436 2.2 documents, you may need to enable or prevent individual line breaks as
18437 shown above to restore the correct line breaking behavior.
18440 \begin_layout Subsection
18442 \begin_inset Index idx
18445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18452 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18454 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
18461 \begin_layout Standard
18462 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
18463 but automatically in the output.
18464 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18470 \begin_inset Index idx
18473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18480 following the rules of the document language.
18482 does not hyphenate text in the
18486 font and words immediately preceded or followed by hyphens or dashes.
18489 \begin_layout Standard
18491 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
18495 font and with unusual constructs, like
18496 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18500 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18504 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
18505 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
18506 This is done with the menu
18508 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18509 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18511 \begin_inset space ~
18517 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18519 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
18523 \begin_layout Standard
18524 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
18525 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
18527 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18531 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18536 would then see the hyphen
18537 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18541 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18544 as a line break possibility.
18545 A line break at this point would look ugly.
18546 To prevent the shortcut from being broken, you can use a protected hyphen
18549 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18550 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18553 ) or put it into a makebox as described in section
18555 Prevent Hyphenation
18560 \begin_inset space ~
18568 \begin_layout Subsection
18570 \begin_inset Index idx
18573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18582 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18583 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
18584 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18586 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
18593 \begin_layout Standard
18594 When \SpecialChar LyX
18595 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
18596 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
18598 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
18601 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18604 appropriate amount of space.
18605 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18608 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
18610 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
18611 gets after another word.
18614 \begin_layout Standard
18615 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
18616 not work in all cases.
18618 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18626 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18629 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
18630 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
18633 \begin_layout Standard
18634 Here are some examples of
18638 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
18641 \begin_layout Itemize
18646 \begin_layout Itemize
18651 \begin_layout Standard
18652 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
18655 \begin_layout Itemize
18657 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18661 this is too much space!
18664 \begin_layout Itemize
18669 \begin_layout Standard
18670 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
18673 \begin_layout Standard
18674 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
18677 \begin_layout Enumerate
18681 \begin_inset space ~
18686 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
18687 \begin_inset space ~
18691 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18693 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
18698 \begin_inset Index idx
18701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18702 Spaces ! inter-word
18710 \begin_layout Enumerate
18714 \begin_inset space ~
18719 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
18720 \begin_inset space ~
18724 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18726 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
18731 \begin_inset Index idx
18734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18743 \begin_layout Enumerate
18747 \begin_inset space ~
18751 \begin_inset space ~
18755 \begin_inset space ~
18762 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18764 \begin_inset space ~
18769 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
18770 This function is also bound to
18773 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
18779 \begin_layout Standard
18780 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
18783 \begin_layout Itemize
18785 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18789 \begin_inset space \space{}
18792 this is too much space!
18795 \begin_layout Itemize
18796 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
18800 \begin_layout Standard
18801 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
18802 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
18804 will take care of this.
18807 \begin_layout Standard
18808 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
18812 \begin_inset space ~
18818 feature described in the section
18820 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
18825 Additional Features
18830 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18832 \begin_inset Index idx
18835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18836 Typography ! Quotation marks
18842 \begin_inset Index idx
18845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18846 Quotation marks | see
18850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18876 \begin_layout Standard
18878 usually sets quotation marks correctly.
18879 Specifically, it will insert an opening mark at the beginning of quoted
18880 text, and use a closing mark at the end.
18882 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18886 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18890 The keyboard character,
18894 , generates this automatically.
18897 \begin_layout Standard
18898 You can specify what character the
18902 key produces by using the submenu
18908 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18912 \begin_inset Index idx
18915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18916 Document ! Settings
18921 dialog and switching the
18925 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
18926 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language).
18928 \begin_inset space ~
18934 \begin_layout Labeling
18935 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18939 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18943 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18947 \begin_inset space ~
18951 \begin_inset space ~
18955 \begin_inset Quotes els
18959 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18965 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18969 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18973 \begin_inset Quotes els
18977 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18980 quotation marks (as common, e.
18981 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18987 \begin_layout Labeling
18988 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18991 \begin_inset Quotes sld
18995 \begin_inset Quotes sld
18999 \begin_inset space ~
19003 \begin_inset space ~
19007 \begin_inset Quotes sls
19011 \begin_inset Quotes srs
19017 \begin_inset Quotes sld
19021 \begin_inset Quotes sld
19025 \begin_inset Quotes sls
19029 \begin_inset Quotes srs
19032 quotation marks (as common, e.
19033 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19039 \begin_layout Labeling
19040 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19043 \begin_inset Quotes gld
19047 \begin_inset Quotes grd
19051 \begin_inset space ~
19055 \begin_inset space ~
19059 \begin_inset Quotes gls
19063 \begin_inset Quotes grs
19069 \begin_inset Quotes gld
19073 \begin_inset Quotes grd
19077 \begin_inset Quotes gls
19081 \begin_inset Quotes grs
19084 quotation marks (as common, e.
19085 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19091 \begin_layout Labeling
19092 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19095 \begin_inset Quotes pld
19099 \begin_inset Quotes prd
19103 \begin_inset space ~
19107 \begin_inset space ~
19111 \begin_inset Quotes pls
19115 \begin_inset Quotes prs
19121 \begin_inset Quotes pld
19125 \begin_inset Quotes prd
19129 \begin_inset Quotes pls
19133 \begin_inset Quotes prs
19136 quotation marks (as common, e.
19137 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19143 \begin_layout Labeling
19144 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19147 \begin_inset Quotes cld
19151 \begin_inset Quotes crd
19155 \begin_inset space ~
19159 \begin_inset space ~
19163 \begin_inset Quotes cls
19167 \begin_inset Quotes crs
19173 \begin_inset Quotes cld
19177 \begin_inset Quotes crd
19181 \begin_inset Quotes cls
19185 \begin_inset Quotes crs
19188 quotation marks (as common, e.
19189 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19192 g., in Switzerland)
19195 \begin_layout Labeling
19196 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19199 \begin_inset Quotes ald
19203 \begin_inset Quotes ard
19207 \begin_inset space ~
19211 \begin_inset space ~
19215 \begin_inset Quotes als
19219 \begin_inset Quotes ars
19225 \begin_inset Quotes ald
19229 \begin_inset Quotes ard
19233 \begin_inset Quotes als
19237 \begin_inset Quotes ars
19240 quotation marks (as common, e.
19241 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19247 \begin_layout Labeling
19248 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19251 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19255 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19259 \begin_inset space ~
19263 \begin_inset space ~
19267 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19271 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19277 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19281 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19285 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19289 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19292 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
19295 \begin_layout Labeling
19296 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19299 \begin_inset Quotes bld
19303 \begin_inset Quotes brd
19307 \begin_inset space ~
19311 \begin_inset space ~
19315 \begin_inset Quotes bls
19319 \begin_inset Quotes brs
19325 \begin_inset Quotes bld
19329 \begin_inset Quotes brd
19333 \begin_inset Quotes bls
19337 \begin_inset Quotes brs
19340 quotation marks (as common, e.
19341 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19344 g., in Great Britain)
19347 \begin_layout Labeling
19348 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19351 \begin_inset Quotes fld
19355 \begin_inset Quotes frd
19359 \begin_inset space ~
19363 \begin_inset space ~
19367 \begin_inset Quotes fls
19371 \begin_inset Quotes frs
19377 \begin_inset Quotes fld
19381 \begin_inset Quotes frd
19385 \begin_inset Quotes fls
19389 \begin_inset Quotes frs
19392 quotation marks (as common, e.
19393 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19399 \begin_layout Labeling
19400 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19403 \begin_inset Quotes ild
19407 \begin_inset Quotes ird
19411 \begin_inset space ~
19415 \begin_inset space ~
19419 \begin_inset Quotes ils
19423 \begin_inset Quotes irs
19429 \begin_inset Quotes ild
19433 \begin_inset Quotes ird
19437 \begin_inset Quotes ils
19441 \begin_inset Quotes irs
19444 quotation marks (another style common in France)
19448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19449 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
19450 since these look identical to the inner marks.
19451 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where
19452 the inner marks differ).
19460 \begin_layout Labeling
19461 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19464 \begin_inset Quotes rld
19468 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
19472 \begin_inset space ~
19476 \begin_inset space ~
19480 \begin_inset Quotes rls
19484 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
19490 \begin_inset Quotes rld
19494 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
19498 \begin_inset Quotes rls
19502 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
19505 quotation marks (as common, e.
19506 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19512 \begin_layout Labeling
19513 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19516 \begin_inset Quotes wld
19520 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
19524 \begin_inset space ~
19528 \begin_inset space ~
19532 \begin_inset Quotes wls
19536 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
19542 \begin_inset Quotes wld
19546 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
19550 \begin_inset Quotes wls
19554 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
19557 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
19560 \begin_layout Labeling
19561 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19562 \begin_inset Quotes jld
19570 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
19576 \begin_inset space ~
19580 \begin_inset space ~
19586 \begin_inset Quotes jls
19594 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
19598 \begin_inset Quotes jld
19602 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
19606 \begin_inset Quotes jls
19610 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
19613 quotation marks (as common, e.
19614 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19622 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
19623 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
19631 \begin_layout Labeling
19632 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19633 \begin_inset Quotes kld
19641 \begin_inset Quotes krd
19647 \begin_inset space ~
19651 \begin_inset space ~
19657 \begin_inset Quotes kls
19665 \begin_inset Quotes krs
19669 \begin_inset Quotes kld
19673 \begin_inset Quotes krd
19677 \begin_inset Quotes kls
19681 \begin_inset Quotes krs
19684 quotation marks (as common, e.
19685 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19688 g., in North Korea and China)
19692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19693 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
19694 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
19702 \begin_layout Standard
19703 Inner quotation marks
19707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19708 In many writing cultures, these are single quotation marks.
19709 But as the British and French styles show, this is not necessarily the
19710 case (and specifically the British style shows that
19711 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19715 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19718 does not necessarily mean
19719 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19723 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19727 This is why we call them
19728 \begin_inset Quotes els
19732 \begin_inset Quotes ers
19736 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19740 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19748 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages, such
19750 \begin_inset Quotes els
19754 \begin_inset Quotes ers
19757 ) can be obtained by means of the shortcut
19760 arg "quote-insert inner"
19765 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19771 \begin_layout Standard
19772 By default, the quotation mark styles are persistent.
19773 That is to say, a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when
19774 it was inserted, even if the document-wide style changes.
19775 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
19776 If you check the setting
19778 Use dynamic quotation marks
19782 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
19783 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
19786 , however, special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
19787 they appear in a special color).
19788 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
19789 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in
19791 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19794 g., if your publisher requests a different style).
19797 \begin_layout Standard
19798 Individual quotation marks (i.
19799 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19802 e., their level [inner, outer], side [opening, closing], and style) can be
19803 easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a
19807 \begin_layout Subsection
19809 \begin_inset Index idx
19812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19813 Typography ! Ligatures
19819 \begin_inset Index idx
19822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19851 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19853 name "subsec:Ligatures"
19860 \begin_layout Standard
19861 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
19862 print them as single characters.
19863 These groups are known as
19868 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
19869 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
19871 Here are the standard ligatures:
19874 \begin_layout Itemize
19878 \begin_layout Itemize
19882 \begin_layout Itemize
19886 \begin_layout Itemize
19890 \begin_layout Itemize
19894 \begin_layout Standard
19895 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
19898 \begin_layout Standard
19899 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
19900 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
19901 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19905 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19908 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
19909 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19913 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19917 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19921 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19924 To break a ligature, use
19926 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19927 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
19929 \begin_inset space ~
19936 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19940 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19944 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19947 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
19949 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19953 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19957 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19961 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19964 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
19966 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19972 \begin_layout Subsection
19974 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
19976 \begin_inset Index idx
19979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19989 \begin_layout Standard
19992 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19993 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
19997 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
20000 \begin_layout Description
20002 The name of the game.
20005 \begin_layout Description
20007 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
20011 \begin_layout Description
20013 The \SpecialChar TeX
20014 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
20018 \begin_layout Description
20019 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
20020 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
20024 \begin_layout Standard
20025 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
20027 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20031 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
20035 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20039 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
20040 world to give programs geek version numbers.
20041 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
20042 converges to the number
20043 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
20046 : The actual version is
20047 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20052 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20055 , the previous one was
20056 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20061 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20067 \begin_layout Subsection
20069 \begin_inset Index idx
20072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20081 \begin_layout Standard
20082 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
20083 space between two words.
20084 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
20087 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20091 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20094 for units use the menu
20096 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20097 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
20099 \begin_inset space ~
20107 arg "space-insert thin"
20113 \begin_layout Standard
20114 Here is an example to show the differences:
20117 \begin_layout Standard
20118 \begin_inset Tabular
20119 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
20120 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
20121 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
20122 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
20124 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20129 \begin_inset space ~
20133 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
20141 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20145 space between number and unit
20152 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20157 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20161 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
20169 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20173 half space between number and unit
20186 \begin_layout Subsection
20188 \begin_inset Index idx
20191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20192 Typography ! Widows and orphans
20200 \begin_layout Standard
20201 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
20203 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
20204 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
20205 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
20206 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
20207 These bits of text became known as
20218 \begin_layout Standard
20219 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
20220 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
20221 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
20222 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
20223 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
20224 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
20225 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
20226 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
20227 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
20228 \begin_inset Newline newline
20236 \begin_inset Newline newline
20244 \begin_inset Newline newline
20247 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
20248 preamble of your document to avoid them.
20249 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
20251 \begin_inset space ~
20255 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
20257 key "latexcompanion"
20263 \begin_inset space ~
20267 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
20274 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
20275 's page break mechanism.
20278 \begin_layout Chapter
20279 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
20280 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20282 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
20289 \begin_layout Standard
20290 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
20293 \begin_inset space ~
20299 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
20302 \begin_layout Section
20304 \begin_inset Index idx
20307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20314 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20323 \begin_layout Standard
20325 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
20328 \begin_layout Description
20331 \begin_inset space ~
20334 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
20335 \begin_inset Newline newline
20339 \begin_inset Note Note
20342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20343 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
20351 \begin_layout Description
20352 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
20353 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
20354 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
20357 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
20358 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
20360 \begin_inset space ~
20366 \begin_inset Newline newline
20370 \begin_inset Note Comment
20373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20374 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
20383 \begin_layout Description
20385 \begin_inset space ~
20388 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
20389 set in the document settings under
20391 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
20393 \begin_inset space ~
20399 \begin_inset Newline newline
20403 \begin_inset Newline newline
20407 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
20410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20416 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
20417 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
20422 of a comment that appears in the output.
20428 \begin_inset Newline newline
20432 \begin_inset Newline newline
20435 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
20438 \begin_layout Standard
20439 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
20447 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20451 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
20454 \begin_layout Section
20456 \begin_inset Index idx
20459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20466 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20468 name "sec:Footnotes"
20475 \begin_layout Standard
20477 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
20480 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20483 or the toolbar button
20486 arg "footnote-insert"
20498 \begin_inset Graphics
20499 filename clipart/footnote.png
20508 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
20509 's representation of your footnote.
20519 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20527 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20538 label, the box will
20542 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
20543 Clicking on the box label again will close
20556 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
20557 and click on the footnote
20572 \begin_layout Standard
20573 Here is an example footnote:
20581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20582 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
20590 \begin_layout Standard
20591 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
20592 position where the footnote box is placed.
20593 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
20594 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
20595 according to the document class.
20597 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
20598 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
20604 ey are described in the
20607 \begin_inset space ~
20615 \begin_layout Section
20617 \begin_inset Index idx
20620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20627 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20629 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
20636 \begin_layout Standard
20637 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
20639 When you insert a margin note via the menu
20641 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20643 \begin_inset space ~
20648 or the toolbar button
20651 arg "marginalnote-insert"
20670 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20674 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20677 appearing within your text.
20678 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
20679 's representation of your margin
20688 \begin_layout Standard
20689 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
20693 \begin_inset Marginal
20696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20698 This is a marginal note.
20706 \begin_layout Standard
20707 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
20708 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
20709 pages, right on odd pages.
20712 \begin_layout Standard
20713 For further information about marginal notes see the section
20716 \begin_inset space ~
20724 \begin_inset space ~
20732 \begin_layout Section
20733 Graphics and Images
20734 \begin_inset Index idx
20737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20744 \begin_inset Index idx
20747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20754 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20756 name "sec:Graphics"
20763 \begin_layout Standard
20764 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
20765 you want and click on the toolbar icon
20768 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
20773 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20777 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
20780 \begin_layout Standard
20781 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
20786 tab allows you to choose your image file.
20787 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
20789 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
20790 \begin_inset space ~
20794 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20796 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
20803 \begin_layout Standard
20808 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
20809 of the image in the output.
20810 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
20814 \begin_inset space ~
20818 \begin_inset space ~
20827 \begin_inset space ~
20831 \begin_inset space ~
20835 \begin_inset space ~
20840 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
20841 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
20849 \begin_layout Standard
20853 \begin_inset space ~
20857 \begin_inset space ~
20862 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
20863 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
20865 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
20870 \begin_inset space ~
20875 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
20876 with the image size is printed.
20879 \begin_layout Standard
20880 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
20881 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
20883 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
20886 \begin_layout Standard
20888 \begin_inset Graphics
20889 filename clipart/2D-intensity-plot.pdf
20897 \begin_layout Standard
20898 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
20899 the image into a float, see section
20900 \begin_inset space ~
20904 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20906 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
20913 \begin_layout Subsection
20915 \begin_inset Index idx
20918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20925 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20927 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
20934 \begin_layout Standard
20935 You can insert images in any known file format.
20936 But as we explained in section
20937 \begin_inset space ~
20941 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20943 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
20947 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
20949 therefore uses the program
20953 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
20954 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
20955 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
20956 \begin_inset space ~
20960 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20962 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
20969 \begin_layout Standard
20970 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
20973 \begin_layout Description
20975 \begin_inset space ~
20978 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
20979 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
20980 Well-known bitmap image formats are
20981 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20984 Graphics Interchange Format
20985 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20988 (GIF, file extension
20989 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20997 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21001 \begin_inset Index idx
21004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21033 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21036 Portable Network Graphics
21037 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21040 (PNG, file extension
21041 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21049 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21053 \begin_inset Index idx
21056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21085 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21088 Joint Photographic Experts Group
21089 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21092 (JPG, file extension
21093 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21101 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21105 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21113 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21117 \begin_inset Index idx
21120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21151 \begin_layout Description
21153 \begin_inset space ~
21156 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
21158 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
21159 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
21160 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
21161 \begin_inset Newline newline
21164 Scalable image formats can be
21165 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21168 Scalable Vector Graphics
21169 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21172 (SVG, file extension
21173 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21181 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21185 \begin_inset Index idx
21188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21217 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21220 Encapsulated PostScript
21221 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21224 (EPS, file extension
21225 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21233 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21237 \begin_inset Index idx
21240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21269 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21272 Portable Document Format
21273 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21276 (PDF, file extension
21277 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21285 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21289 \begin_inset Index idx
21292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21300 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21304 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21307 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
21308 result will not be scalable.
21309 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
21314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21315 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
21323 \begin_layout Standard
21324 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
21331 \begin_layout Subsection
21332 Grouping of Image Settings
21333 \begin_inset Index idx
21336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21337 Images ! Settings grouping
21345 \begin_layout Standard
21346 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
21348 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
21349 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
21351 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
21352 need to manually change each of them.
21356 \begin_layout Standard
21357 A new group can be set by pressing the button
21360 \begin_inset space ~
21364 \begin_inset space ~
21376 \begin_inset space ~
21380 \begin_inset space ~
21386 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
21387 and checking the name of the desired group.
21390 \begin_layout Section
21392 \begin_inset Index idx
21395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21402 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21411 \begin_layout Standard
21412 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
21415 arg "tabular-insert"
21420 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21424 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns
21425 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288358
21426 , and you can select a specific (border) style
21429 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
21430 from the rest of the table.
21431 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
21432 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
21434 Here is an example table:
21437 \begin_layout Standard
21439 \begin_inset Tabular
21440 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
21441 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
21442 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21443 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21444 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
21445 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21447 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21456 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21474 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21483 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21494 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21512 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21521 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21530 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21541 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21559 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21568 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21581 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21592 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21610 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21619 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21628 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21643 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288479
21647 \begin_layout Standard
21649 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288540
21650 This corresponds to the
21651 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21655 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21658 table style listed in the style selection.
21661 \begin_layout Standard
21663 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288387
21664 Other available styles include:
21667 \begin_layout Itemize
21669 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288551
21671 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21675 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21678 which looks line the above table, but without the first row being separated
21682 \begin_layout Itemize
21684 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288764
21685 a border-less table with no lines at all,
21688 \begin_layout Itemize
21690 \change_inserted -712698321 1554289543
21692 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21696 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21699 as often used in professional publishing with horizontal lines only and
21700 bold top/bottom lines (see
21711 \begin_layout Standard
21713 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288823
21714 The default style used in the dialog as well as the style used by the toolbar
21715 button can be changed in
21717 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
21718 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
21722 So if the default style above is not the one you need, you should alter
21726 \begin_layout Subsection
21730 \begin_layout Standard
21731 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
21734 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
21738 This brings up the table dialog.
21739 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
21740 cursor is placed currently.
21741 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
21742 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
21743 done on all of your selection.
21746 \begin_layout Standard
21747 In addition to the table dialog, the
21750 \begin_inset space ~
21755 helps you in setting table properties.
21756 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
21759 \begin_layout Standard
21763 \begin_inset space ~
21768 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
21769 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
21770 current cell respectively.
21771 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
21773 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
21774 of text, see section
21775 \begin_inset space ~
21779 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21781 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
21788 \begin_layout Standard
21789 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
21790 using the check box
21799 This will merge the cells to
21803 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
21804 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
21805 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
21806 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
21807 in the last row without the upper border:
21810 \begin_layout Standard
21812 \begin_inset Tabular
21813 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
21814 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
21815 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21816 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
21817 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
21818 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21820 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21829 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21838 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21847 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21858 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21876 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21885 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21894 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21905 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21914 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21923 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21949 \begin_layout Standard
21950 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
21951 -arguments for the table.
21952 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
21953 explained in the chapter
21960 \begin_inset space ~
21966 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
21967 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
21968 but are visible in the output.
21971 \begin_layout Standard
21972 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
21975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21980 Most DVI-viewers are
21984 able to display rotations.
21992 \begin_layout Standard
21997 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
22002 adds lines for all cell borders.
22005 \begin_layout Subsection
22007 \begin_inset Index idx
22010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22011 Tables ! Multi-page
22017 \begin_inset Index idx
22020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22029 \begin_layout Standard
22030 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
22033 \begin_inset space ~
22037 \begin_inset space ~
22045 \begin_inset space ~
22050 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
22051 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
22054 \begin_layout Description
22059 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
22060 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
22061 Except for the first page, if
22064 \begin_inset space ~
22072 \begin_layout Description
22076 \begin_inset space ~
22081 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
22082 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
22085 \begin_layout Description
22090 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
22091 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
22092 except for the last page, if
22095 \begin_inset space ~
22103 \begin_layout Description
22107 \begin_inset space ~
22112 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
22113 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
22116 \begin_layout Description
22117 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
22118 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
22120 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22124 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
22127 \begin_inset space ~
22135 \begin_layout Standard
22136 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
22137 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
22138 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
22144 In this context, first means first in this order:
22147 \begin_inset space ~
22159 \begin_inset space ~
22164 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
22167 \begin_layout Standard
22169 \begin_inset Tabular
22170 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
22171 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
22172 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
22173 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22174 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22175 <row endfirsthead="true">
22176 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22182 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
22187 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22196 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22206 <row endfirsthead="true">
22207 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22218 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22227 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22239 <row endhead="true">
22240 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22251 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22260 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22270 <row endhead="true">
22271 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22282 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22291 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22303 <row endfoot="true">
22304 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22315 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22324 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22335 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22346 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22355 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22366 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22377 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22386 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22397 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22408 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22417 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22428 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22439 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22448 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22470 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22479 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22490 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22501 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22510 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22521 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22532 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22541 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22552 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22563 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22583 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22594 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22603 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22614 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22625 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22634 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22645 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22656 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22665 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22676 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22696 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22707 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22718 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22727 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22738 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22749 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22758 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22780 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22789 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22800 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22811 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22820 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22842 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22851 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22862 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22882 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22893 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22904 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22913 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22924 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22944 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22966 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22975 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22986 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23006 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23017 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23028 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23037 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23048 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23059 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23068 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23090 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23099 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23110 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23121 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23130 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23141 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23152 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23161 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23245 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23265 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23285 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23296 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23305 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
23308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23314 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23325 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23345 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23356 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23376 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23387 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23398 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23407 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23418 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23438 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23449 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23460 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23469 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23480 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23491 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23500 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23511 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23522 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23542 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23553 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23562 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23573 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23584 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23593 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23604 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23615 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23624 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23635 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23646 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23655 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23666 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23677 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23686 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23697 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23708 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23717 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23728 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23739 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23748 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23759 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23779 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23790 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23810 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23821 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23832 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23841 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23852 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23863 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23883 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23894 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23903 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23914 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23925 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23934 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23945 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23956 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23965 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23976 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23996 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24007 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24018 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24027 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24038 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24049 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24058 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24069 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24100 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24111 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24131 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24142 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24151 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24162 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24193 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24224 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24255 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24266 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24285 <row endlastfoot="true">
24286 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24297 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
24300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24306 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24323 \begin_layout Subsection
24325 \begin_inset Index idx
24328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24335 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24337 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
24344 \begin_layout Standard
24345 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
24346 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
24347 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
24348 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
24352 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
24355 \begin_layout Standard
24356 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
24357 for the column in the table dialog.
24358 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
24359 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
24363 \begin_layout Standard
24365 \begin_inset Tabular
24366 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
24367 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
24368 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24369 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
24370 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24390 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24408 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24428 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24446 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24459 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
24464 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24484 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24502 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24515 This is longer now.
24520 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24540 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24558 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24571 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
24572 This is longer now.
24577 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24603 \begin_layout Standard
24604 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
24605 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
24609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24610 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
24611 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
24617 Selection with the mouse or with
24621 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
24622 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
24623 the selection from outside the table.
24626 \begin_layout Section
24628 \begin_inset Index idx
24631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24638 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24647 \begin_layout Subsection
24651 \begin_layout Standard
24652 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
24653 have a fixed location.
24655 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24659 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24662 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
24670 \begin_inset space ~
24675 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
24676 too many notes on the current page.
24679 \begin_layout Standard
24680 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
24681 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
24682 and pages without text.
24683 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
24684 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
24685 Floats are therefore numbered.
24686 Referencing is described in section
24687 \begin_inset space ~
24691 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24693 reference "sec:Cross-References"
24700 \begin_layout Standard
24701 To insert a float, use the menu
24703 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24707 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
24708 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
24710 After the label you can insert the caption text.
24711 \begin_inset Index idx
24714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24720 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
24721 paragraph within the float.
24722 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
24723 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
24724 left-clicking on the box label.
24725 A closed float box looks like this:
24726 \begin_inset Graphics
24727 filename clipart/float.png
24732 – a gray button with a red label.
24735 \begin_layout Standard
24736 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
24738 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
24741 \begin_layout Subsection
24743 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24745 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
24750 \begin_inset Index idx
24753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24754 Floats ! Figure floats
24762 \begin_layout Standard
24764 \begin_inset space ~
24768 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24770 reference "fig:A-star-in"
24774 was created using the menu
24776 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24777 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
24783 arg "float-insert figure"
24787 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
24790 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24796 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
24800 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
24801 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
24803 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24805 \begin_inset space ~
24813 arg "layout-paragraph"
24819 \begin_layout Standard
24820 \begin_inset Float figure
24827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24829 \begin_inset Graphics
24830 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
24839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24840 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24843 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24845 name "fig:A-star-in"
24862 \begin_layout Standard
24863 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
24864 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
24866 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24875 ) and refer to it using the menu
24877 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24883 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
24887 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
24888 vague references like
24889 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24893 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24896 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
24897 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
24899 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24903 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24907 For more about cross-references, see section
24908 \begin_inset space ~
24912 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24914 reference "sec:Cross-References"
24921 \begin_layout Standard
24922 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
24923 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
24924 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
24925 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
24926 as described in section
24927 \begin_inset space ~
24931 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24933 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
24939 \begin_inset space ~
24943 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24945 reference "fig:Two-images"
24949 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
24950 You can also set the images one below the other.
24952 \begin_inset space ~
24956 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24958 reference "fig:Undefinable"
24963 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24965 reference "fig:Star"
24969 are the subfigures.
24972 \begin_layout Standard
24973 \begin_inset Float figure
24980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24981 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
24985 \begin_inset Float figure
24992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24993 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24996 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24998 name "fig:Undefinable"
25010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25011 \begin_inset Graphics
25012 filename clipart/3D-structure-distort.pdf
25024 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25028 \begin_inset Float figure
25035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25036 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25039 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25054 \begin_inset Graphics
25055 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
25067 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25074 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25077 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25079 name "fig:Two-images"
25096 \begin_layout Subsection
25098 \begin_inset Index idx
25101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25102 Floats ! Table floats
25110 \begin_layout Standard
25111 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
25113 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25114 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
25117 or the toolbar button
25120 arg "float-insert table"
25124 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
25125 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
25126 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
25128 \begin_inset space ~
25132 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25134 reference "tab:Table-float"
25141 \begin_layout Standard
25142 \begin_inset Float table
25149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25150 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25153 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25155 name "tab:Table-float"
25167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25169 \begin_inset Tabular
25170 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
25171 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25172 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25173 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25174 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25176 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25212 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25232 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25250 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25268 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25301 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
25309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25322 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
25325 \end{array}\right]$
25333 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25346 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
25367 \begin_layout Subsection
25369 \begin_inset Index idx
25372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25381 \begin_layout Standard
25383 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
25384 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
25385 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
25387 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
25395 \begin_inset space ~
25403 \begin_layout Section
25405 \begin_inset Index idx
25408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25417 \begin_layout Standard
25419 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
25421 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
25422 \begin_inset space \space{}
25429 \begin_layout Standard
25430 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
25431 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
25433 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25437 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
25438 and its alignment within the page.
25441 \begin_layout Standard
25443 \begin_inset Box Frameless
25453 height_special "totalheight"
25458 backgroundcolor "none"
25461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25464 This is a minipage.
25465 The text is set in an italic style.
25468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25471 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
25472 another formatting.
25480 \begin_layout Standard
25481 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
25484 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
25488 as described in section
25489 \begin_inset space ~
25493 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25495 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
25500 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
25506 \begin_layout Standard
25507 \begin_inset Box Frameless
25517 height_special "totalheight"
25522 backgroundcolor "none"
25525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25526 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
25527 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
25533 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25537 \begin_inset Box Frameless
25547 height_special "totalheight"
25552 backgroundcolor "none"
25555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25556 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
25557 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
25565 \begin_layout Standard
25566 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
25572 \begin_layout Standard
25573 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
25575 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
25582 \begin_inset space ~
25590 \begin_layout Chapter
25591 Mathematical Formulas
25592 \begin_inset Index idx
25595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25602 \begin_inset Index idx
25605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25634 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25636 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
25643 \begin_layout Standard
25644 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
25649 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
25652 \begin_layout Section
25654 \begin_inset Index idx
25657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25666 \begin_layout Standard
25667 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
25680 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
25682 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
25683 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
25684 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
25686 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25692 \begin_layout Standard
25693 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
25697 \begin_inset space ~
25702 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
25705 \begin_layout Standard
25706 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
25707 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
25710 \begin_layout Standard
25711 This is a line with an inline formula
25712 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
25718 \begin_layout Standard
25719 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
25720 paragraph, like this one:
25721 \begin_inset Formula
25728 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
25731 \begin_layout Standard
25733 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
25735 For example, typing
25736 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25746 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25749 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
25750 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
25754 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
25757 \begin_inset space ~
25765 \begin_layout Subsection
25766 Navigating in Formulas
25767 \begin_inset Index idx
25770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25779 \begin_layout Standard
25780 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
25781 achieved with the arrow keys.
25783 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
25784 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
25789 will leave a formula construct (a square root
25790 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
25794 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
25798 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
25801 \end{array}\right]$
25809 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
25814 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
25815 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
25818 \begin_layout Standard
25823 , printed in this document as
25824 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25828 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25832 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25835 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
25836 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
25837 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
25842 For example, if you want
25843 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
25851 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25861 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25865 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25870 , since in the latter case only the
25873 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
25878 will be under the square root sign:
25879 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
25885 \begin_layout Standard
25886 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
25888 \begin_inset Formula
25890 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
25899 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
25900 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
25903 \begin_layout Subsection
25907 \begin_layout Standard
25908 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
25909 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
25913 and a cursor movement key to select text.
25914 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
25915 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
25916 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
25917 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
25921 \begin_layout Subsection
25922 Exponents and Subscripts
25923 \begin_inset Index idx
25926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25933 \begin_inset Index idx
25936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25945 \begin_layout Standard
25946 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
25949 arg "math-superscript"
25955 arg "math-subscript"
25958 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
25960 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
25963 , type in a formula
25966 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25976 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
25982 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
25986 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
25992 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25998 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
26000 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26004 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26007 , you have to use an extra
26011 to separate the circumflex and the character.
26012 For example, if you want
26013 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
26019 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26025 Subscripts are similar: To get
26026 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
26032 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26040 \begin_layout Subsection
26042 \begin_inset Index idx
26045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26054 \begin_layout Standard
26055 Create a fraction either with the command
26061 or by using the icon
26064 arg "math-insert \\frac"
26070 \begin_inset space ~
26076 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
26077 The cursor is above the fraction line.
26078 To move it to the bottom, simply press
26083 To move back up, press
26088 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
26089 \begin_inset Formula
26091 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
26094 \end{array}\right)}\right]
26102 \begin_layout Subsection
26104 \begin_inset Index idx
26107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26116 \begin_layout Standard
26117 Roots can be created using the
26120 \begin_inset space ~
26128 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
26134 arg "math-insert \\root"
26156 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
26162 always produces a square root.
26165 \begin_layout Subsection
26166 Operators with Limits
26167 \begin_inset Index idx
26170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26177 \begin_inset Index idx
26180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26187 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26189 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
26196 \begin_layout Standard
26198 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
26202 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
26205 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
26206 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
26207 by entering them as you would enter a super-
26208 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
26209 The sum operator will automatically place its
26210 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26214 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26217 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
26219 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
26223 \begin_inset Formula
26225 \sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
26230 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
26234 \begin_layout Standard
26235 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
26237 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
26238 behind the operator and using the menu
26240 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26241 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26243 \begin_inset space ~
26247 \begin_inset space ~
26261 \begin_layout Standard
26262 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
26263 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26267 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26271 \begin_inset Index idx
26274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26281 \begin_inset Formula
26283 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
26288 which will place the
26289 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
26293 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26297 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26301 In inline formulas it looks like this:
26302 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
26308 \begin_layout Standard
26309 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
26316 Have a look at section
26317 \begin_inset space ~
26321 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26323 reference "subsec:Functions"
26327 for an explanation of function macros.
26330 \begin_layout Subsection
26332 \begin_inset Index idx
26335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26344 \begin_layout Standard
26345 Most math symbols can be found in the
26348 \begin_inset space ~
26353 under one of several categories; including
26370 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
26374 \begin_layout Standard
26375 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26376 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
26377 don't have to use the
26380 \begin_inset space ~
26385 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
26387 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
26390 \begin_layout Subsection
26392 \begin_inset Index idx
26395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26404 \begin_layout Standard
26405 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
26411 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
26417 \begin_inset space ~
26425 arg "math-insert \\space"
26429 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
26430 For example, the sequence
26435 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
26438 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26440 \begin_inset Graphics
26441 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
26446 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
26447 the space marker and enter space again several times.
26448 With every space enter the size will be changed.
26449 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
26450 , because they are negative
26452 Here are two examples:
26455 \begin_layout Standard
26465 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
26471 \begin_layout Standard
26481 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
26487 \begin_layout Subsection
26489 \begin_inset Index idx
26492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26499 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26501 name "subsec:Functions"
26508 \begin_layout Standard
26512 \begin_inset space ~
26517 contains under the button
26520 arg "math-insert \\functions"
26523 a number of function macros, such as
26524 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
26528 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
26536 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
26543 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
26544 avoid confusions, because
26545 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
26549 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
26555 \begin_layout Standard
26556 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
26558 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
26562 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
26568 \begin_layout Standard
26569 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
26570 are placed, as described in section
26571 \begin_inset space ~
26575 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26577 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
26584 \begin_layout Subsection
26586 \begin_inset Index idx
26589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26598 \begin_layout Standard
26599 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
26601 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
26602 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
26603 commands, for example, to enter
26604 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
26607 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
26608 Our example is entered by typing
26613 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26620 \begin_inset space ~
26624 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26626 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
26630 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
26633 \begin_layout Standard
26634 \begin_inset Float table
26641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26642 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26645 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26647 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
26651 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
26659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26661 \begin_inset Tabular
26662 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
26663 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
26664 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26665 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26666 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26668 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26677 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26686 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26706 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26724 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26737 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26750 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
26760 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26778 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26791 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26804 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
26814 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26832 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26845 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26858 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
26868 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26886 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26899 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26912 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
26922 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26940 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26953 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26966 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
26976 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26994 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27007 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27020 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
27030 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27048 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27061 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27074 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
27084 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27102 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27115 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27128 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
27138 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27169 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27182 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
27192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27227 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
27248 \begin_layout Standard
27249 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
27252 \begin_inset space ~
27260 arg "math-insert \\hat"
27263 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
27267 \begin_layout Section
27268 Brackets and Delimiters
27269 \begin_inset Index idx
27272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27279 \begin_inset Index idx
27282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27289 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27291 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
27298 \begin_layout Standard
27299 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
27301 For some purposes, using just the keys
27306 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
27307 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
27308 toolbar delimiter icon
27311 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
27315 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
27316 \begin_inset Formula
27318 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
27326 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
27327 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
27331 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
27334 and the expression on the right was entered using the
27340 \begin_inset Formula
27342 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
27350 \begin_layout Standard
27351 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
27352 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
27356 \begin_layout Standard
27357 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
27358 left side and right side.
27359 If you use the option
27362 \begin_inset space ~
27367 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
27368 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
27370 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
27375 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
27376 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
27379 \begin_layout Standard
27380 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
27381 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
27382 is to go inside the brackets.
27383 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
27388 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
27389 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
27390 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
27394 arg "math-delim ( )"
27400 \begin_layout Section
27401 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
27402 \begin_inset Index idx
27405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27412 \begin_inset Index idx
27415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27422 \begin_inset Index idx
27425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27426 Math ! Multi-line Equations
27434 \begin_layout Standard
27435 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
27439 \begin_inset space ~
27447 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
27451 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
27452 Here is an example:
27453 \begin_inset Formula
27455 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
27464 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
27465 \begin_inset space ~
27469 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27471 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
27476 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
27477 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
27478 This alignment is set in the box
27483 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27491 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27495 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27503 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27507 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27515 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27521 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27529 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27532 for every column as default.
27533 For example, the sequence
27534 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27542 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27545 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
27546 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
27547 corresponds to the relevant column.
27548 The result will look like this:
27549 \begin_inset Formula
27552 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
27553 column & has & has\,right\\
27554 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
27563 \begin_layout Standard
27564 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
27567 arg "newline-insert newline"
27570 while the cursor is in the matrix.
27571 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
27573 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27576 or the math toolbar.
27579 \begin_layout Standard
27580 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
27581 It can be created with the menu
27583 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27584 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
27586 \begin_inset space ~
27598 Here is an example:
27599 \begin_inset Formula
27613 \begin_layout Standard
27614 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
27617 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
27620 arg "newline-insert newline"
27624 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
27629 arg "newline-insert newline"
27632 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
27633 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27637 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27640 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
27641 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
27642 A new row is created by every further entry of
27645 arg "newline-insert newline"
27649 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
27650 Here is an example:
27651 \begin_inset Formula
27653 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
27654 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
27659 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
27660 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
27661 \begin_inset Formula
27663 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
27671 \begin_layout Standard
27672 The multi-line formula type described here is called
27679 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
27680 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
27681 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27683 reference "eq:asquared"
27688 The other types are described in section
27689 \begin_inset space ~
27693 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27695 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
27702 \begin_layout Section
27703 Formula Numbering and Referencing
27704 \begin_inset Index idx
27707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27708 Math ! Formula numbering
27714 \begin_inset Index idx
27717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27718 Math ! Referencing formulas
27724 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27726 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
27733 \begin_layout Standard
27734 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
27736 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27737 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
27739 \begin_inset space ~
27743 \begin_inset space ~
27751 arg "math-number-toggle"
27755 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
27756 within parentheses.
27757 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
27758 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
27759 the document class.
27760 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
27761 separated by a dot:
27762 \begin_inset Formula
27772 arg "math-number-toggle"
27775 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
27776 You can only number displayed formulas.
27779 \begin_layout Standard
27780 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
27782 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27783 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
27785 \begin_inset space ~
27789 \begin_inset space ~
27797 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
27800 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
27801 \begin_inset Formula
27804 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
27810 To number all lines use the shortcut
27813 arg "math-number-toggle"
27819 \begin_layout Standard
27820 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
27823 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
27824 A label is inserted with the menu
27826 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27835 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
27836 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
27837 It is recommended that you use the suggested
27838 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27846 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27849 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
27850 label type when you have many labels in your document.
27851 We inserted in the following example the label
27852 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27856 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27859 in the second line:
27860 \begin_inset Formula
27862 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
27863 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
27868 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
27869 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
27870 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
27872 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27874 \begin_inset space ~
27882 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
27886 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
27887 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
27888 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
27889 as the formula number:
27892 \begin_layout Standard
27893 This is a cross-reference to equation (
27894 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27896 reference "eq:tanhExp"
27903 \begin_layout Standard
27904 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
27905 's cross-reference box are described in section
27906 \begin_inset space ~
27910 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27912 reference "sec:Cross-References"
27917 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
27925 \begin_layout Section
27926 User defined math macros
27927 \begin_inset Index idx
27930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27939 \begin_layout Standard
27941 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
27942 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
27943 Math macros are explained in section
27946 \begin_inset space ~
27958 \begin_layout Section
27962 \begin_layout Subsection
27964 \begin_inset Index idx
27967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27976 \begin_layout Standard
27977 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
27978 To set a font in a formula, use the
27981 \begin_inset space ~
27989 arg "math-insert \\font"
27992 , or enter its command, listed in table
27993 \begin_inset space ~
27997 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27999 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
28006 \begin_layout Standard
28007 \begin_inset Float table
28014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28015 \begin_inset Caption Standard
28017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28018 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28020 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
28024 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
28032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28034 \begin_inset Tabular
28035 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
28036 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
28037 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28038 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28040 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28049 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28060 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28070 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
28078 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28093 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28097 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
28105 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28124 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
28132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28147 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28157 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
28165 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28184 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
28192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28207 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28211 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
28219 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28245 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
28253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28268 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28272 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
28280 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28306 \begin_layout Standard
28307 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28315 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
28331 \begin_layout Standard
28332 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
28333 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
28338 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
28339 space when you need a space in the box.
28340 Here is an example where
28341 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28345 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28352 denotes the set of numbers:
28353 \begin_inset Formula
28355 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
28363 \begin_layout Standard
28364 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
28365 You can, for example, put a character in
28374 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
28378 \begin_inset Newline newline
28381 So it is better not to use this feature.
28384 \begin_layout Standard
28385 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
28386 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
28390 \begin_inset Newline newline
28393 You can only print them emboldened using the command
28399 , which works like the other typeface commands:
28400 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
28406 \begin_layout Standard
28413 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
28416 \begin_layout Standard
28417 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
28419 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28420 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
28422 \begin_inset space ~
28430 \begin_layout Subsection
28432 \begin_inset Index idx
28435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28444 \begin_layout Standard
28445 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
28447 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
28451 \begin_inset space ~
28455 \begin_inset space ~
28463 \begin_inset space ~
28471 arg "math-insert \\font"
28475 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
28476 in black instead of blue.
28477 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
28478 Here is an example:
28479 \begin_inset Formula
28482 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
28483 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
28492 \begin_layout Subsection
28494 \begin_inset Index idx
28497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28506 \begin_layout Standard
28507 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
28508 automatically chosen in most situations.
28526 For most characters,
28534 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
28535 and certain other structures, are set larger in
28540 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
28541 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
28542 thinks are appropriate.
28543 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
28546 arg "math-insert \\style"
28550 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
28551 For example, you can set
28552 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
28555 , which is normally in
28564 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
28568 The four styles are used in the following example:
28571 \begin_layout Standard
28572 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
28576 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
28580 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
28584 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
28590 \begin_layout Standard
28591 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
28592 is set in a particular size with the menu
28594 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28596 \begin_inset space ~
28601 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
28602 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
28603 will be adjusted to correspond.
28604 As an example here is a formula in the font size
28605 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28609 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28615 \begin_layout Standard
28619 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
28625 \begin_layout Section
28626 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
28628 \begin_inset Index idx
28631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28638 \begin_inset Index idx
28641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28650 \begin_layout Standard
28652 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
28653 that are in common use.
28656 \begin_layout Subsection
28657 Enabling AMS-Support
28660 \begin_layout Standard
28661 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
28662 the document by selecting the checkbox
28665 \begin_inset space ~
28669 \begin_inset space ~
28673 \begin_inset space ~
28680 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28684 \begin_inset Index idx
28687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28688 Document ! Settings
28696 \begin_inset space ~
28702 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
28703 -errors in formulas,
28704 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
28707 \begin_layout Subsection
28709 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28711 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
28716 \begin_inset Index idx
28719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28720 Math ! Multi-line Equations
28728 \begin_layout Standard
28729 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
28730 provides a selection of different formula types.
28732 allows you to choose between
28753 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
28754 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28761 , for an explanation of these formula types.
28764 \begin_layout Chapter
28768 \begin_layout Section
28770 \begin_inset Index idx
28773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28780 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28782 name "sec:Cross-References"
28789 \begin_layout Standard
28790 One of \SpecialChar LyX
28791 's strengths is cross-references.
28792 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
28794 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
28795 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
28796 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
28799 \begin_layout Enumerate
28803 \begin_layout Enumerate
28804 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28806 name "enu:Second-item"
28813 \begin_layout Enumerate
28817 \begin_layout Standard
28818 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
28820 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28823 or by pressing the toolbar button
28830 A gray label box like this:
28831 \begin_inset Graphics
28832 filename clipart/label.png
28836 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
28838 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
28840 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28848 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28853 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28861 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28865 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28869 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28873 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
28874 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
28876 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28884 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28890 \begin_layout Standard
28891 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
28893 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28896 or the toolbar button
28899 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
28903 A gray cross-reference box like this:
28904 \begin_inset Graphics
28905 filename clipart/reference.png
28909 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
28911 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
28912 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28920 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28924 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
28928 \begin_layout Standard
28929 As an alternative to
28931 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28934 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
28939 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
28940 to the actual cursor position via the menu
28942 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28954 \begin_layout Standard
28955 Here is our cross-reference: Item
28956 \begin_inset space ~
28960 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28962 reference "enu:Second-item"
28969 \begin_layout Standard
28970 It is recommended to use a protected space
28974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28975 described in section
28976 \begin_inset space ~
28980 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28982 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
28991 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
28992 line breaks between them.
28995 \begin_layout Standard
28996 There are eight formats of cross-references:
28999 \begin_layout Description
29000 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
29001 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29003 reference "fig:Two-images"
29010 \begin_layout Description
29011 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
29012 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
29014 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29018 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29022 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29024 reference "eq:tanhExp"
29031 \begin_layout Description
29032 <page>: prints the page number: Page
29033 \begin_inset space ~
29037 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29038 LatexCommand pageref
29039 reference "fig:Two-images"
29046 \begin_layout Description
29048 \begin_inset space ~
29052 \begin_inset space ~
29055 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
29056 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29057 LatexCommand vpageref
29058 reference "fig:Two-images"
29063 \begin_inset Newline newline
29066 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
29067 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
29068 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
29069 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
29070 it prints “on the next page”.
29071 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
29074 \begin_layout Description
29076 \begin_inset space ~
29080 \begin_inset space ~
29084 \begin_inset space ~
29087 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
29088 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29090 reference "fig:Two-images"
29095 \begin_inset Newline newline
29098 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
29104 ; otherwise it behaves like
29108 \begin_inset space ~
29112 \begin_inset space ~
29121 \begin_layout Description
29123 \begin_inset space ~
29126 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
29127 \begin_inset Newline newline
29131 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
29134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29139 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29149 \begin_inset Index idx
29152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29154 packages ! prettyref
29160 \begin_inset Index idx
29163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29165 packages ! refstyle
29176 \begin_inset Newline newline
29179 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
29180 -package should be used for this feature by setting
29183 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
29187 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29188 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29196 is the default and preferred because
29200 supports only English documents.
29201 The format is specified by using the command
29213 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29214 preamble of the document.
29215 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
29217 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29225 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29233 \begin_inset Newline newline
29240 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
29245 \begin_inset Newline newline
29256 predefines reference formats for all available types.
29257 This is especially true for the wide variety of mathematical `theorem'
29259 So if you want to make formatted references to, say, Propositions, then
29260 you will need to define the relevant format yourself.
29265 , you might do so as follows:
29266 \begin_inset Newline newline
29273 newrefformat{prop}{Proposition
29278 \begin_inset Newline newline
29281 For more information about defining formatted references, have a look at
29282 the package documentation
29283 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29285 key "prettyref,refstyle"
29291 \begin_inset Newline newline
29302 will be available with formatted references only if you are using the
29309 \begin_layout Description
29311 \begin_inset space ~
29314 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
29315 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29316 LatexCommand nameref
29317 reference "fig:Two-images"
29324 \begin_layout Description
29326 \begin_inset space ~
29329 only: prints only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29330 label for the reference:
29331 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29332 LatexCommand labelonly
29333 reference "fig:Two-images"
29338 \begin_inset Newline newline
29341 This allows for customization, using \SpecialChar TeX
29342 Code, if you want to issue a command
29343 that \SpecialChar LyX
29349 , then you may want to use the
29352 \begin_inset space ~
29357 option, which will output only the part of the reference following the
29359 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29363 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29367 This is the form needed for e.
29368 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29372 \begin_inset space \space{}
29379 's range commands.The number and current page of the referenced document
29380 part in the output is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
29382 The varieties are adjusted in the field
29386 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
29390 \begin_layout Standard
29391 You can only use the style
29395 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
29399 is always possible.
29402 \begin_layout Standard
29403 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
29404 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
29406 Referencing formulas is explained in section
29407 \begin_inset space ~
29411 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29413 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
29420 \begin_layout Standard
29421 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
29425 \begin_inset space ~
29429 \begin_inset space ~
29434 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
29435 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
29438 \begin_inset space ~
29443 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
29444 You can also go back with the toolbar button
29447 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
29453 \begin_layout Standard
29454 You can change labels at any time.
29455 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
29456 do not need to think about this.
29459 \begin_layout Standard
29460 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
29462 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
29466 \begin_layout Standard
29467 References are described in detail in the section
29468 \begin_inset space ~
29478 \begin_inset space ~
29486 \begin_layout Section
29487 Table of Contents and other Listings
29488 \begin_inset Index idx
29491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29498 \begin_inset Index idx
29501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29502 Navigating ! Outline
29508 \begin_inset Index idx
29511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29518 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29527 \begin_layout Subsection
29529 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29531 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
29538 \begin_layout Standard
29539 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
29541 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29542 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
29544 \begin_inset space ~
29548 \begin_inset space ~
29554 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
29556 If you click on it, the
29560 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
29561 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
29562 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
29564 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
29566 \begin_inset space ~
29571 that is described in section
29572 \begin_inset space ~
29576 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29578 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
29585 \begin_layout Standard
29586 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
29587 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
29589 \begin_inset space ~
29593 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29595 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
29599 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
29601 \begin_inset space ~
29605 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29607 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
29611 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
29613 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
29616 \begin_layout Subsection
29617 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
29618 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29620 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
29627 \begin_layout Standard
29628 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
29630 You can insert them via the
29632 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29633 List/Contents/References
29636 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
29639 \begin_layout Section
29640 URLs and Hyperlinks
29641 \begin_inset Index idx
29644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29651 \begin_inset Index idx
29654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29663 \begin_layout Subsection
29665 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29674 \begin_layout Standard
29675 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
29677 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29683 \begin_layout Standard
29684 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
29686 \begin_inset Flex URL
29689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29691 https://www.lyx.org
29699 \begin_layout Standard
29700 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
29706 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
29710 \begin_layout Standard
29711 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
29714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29719 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
29728 \begin_layout Subsection
29730 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29732 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
29739 \begin_layout Standard
29740 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
29742 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29745 or with the toolbar button
29752 The appearing dialog has two fields:
29761 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
29762 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
29763 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29765 name "LyX's homepage"
29766 target "https://www.lyx.org"
29771 , an Email address like this:
29772 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29774 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
29775 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
29781 , or a link to a file.
29786 in the hyperlink settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
29794 \begin_layout Standard
29795 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
29797 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29805 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29808 to the link target.
29811 \begin_layout Standard
29812 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
29813 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
29814 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
29815 the text style dialog.
29816 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
29820 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29822 name "LyX's homepage"
29823 target "https://www.lyx.org"
29831 \begin_layout Standard
29832 The link text color can be changed, when the option
29836 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
29838 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29839 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29843 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
29845 \begin_inset Newline newline
29853 \begin_inset Newline newline
29860 in the PDF Properties dialog.
29861 \change_inserted -584632292 1588303457
29865 \begin_layout Section
29867 \change_inserted -584632292 1588303474
29869 \begin_inset Index idx
29872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29879 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29881 name "sec:Counters"
29888 \begin_layout Standard
29890 \change_inserted -584632292 1588304632
29891 One powerful feature of \SpecialChar LaTeX
29892 is its ability to manage counters, like the one
29896 \begin_inset CommandInset counter
29906 \change_inserted -584632292 1588304519
29908 Mostly, this is handled automatically, but there are times one wants to
29909 modify counters directly.
29910 This can be done in LyX using the counter inset, which is accessible from
29912 This allows one to set a counter's value; to reset it (to zero); to add
29913 to the value (or subtract from it, since the value added can be negative);
29914 to save it; to restore the saved value; and to print the value.
29915 These effects can also be limited to LyX itself.
29916 And they will appear in HTML and DocBook output, as well as in LaTeX.
29920 \begin_layout Section
29922 \begin_inset Index idx
29925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29932 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29934 name "sec:Appendices"
29941 \begin_layout Standard
29942 Appendices are created with the menu
29944 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29946 \begin_inset space ~
29950 \begin_inset space ~
29956 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
29957 as the appendix part of the book.
29958 This part is marked with a red borderline.
29961 \begin_layout Standard
29962 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
29963 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
29964 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
29965 and the subsection number.
29966 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
29970 \begin_layout Standard
29972 \begin_inset space ~
29976 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29978 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
29986 \begin_inset space ~
29990 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29992 reference "subsec:Export"
29999 \begin_layout Section
30001 \begin_inset Index idx
30004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30011 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30013 name "sec:Bibliography"
30020 \begin_layout Standard
30021 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
30023 You can include a bibliography database, which is explained in sec.
30024 \begin_inset space ~
30028 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30030 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
30037 , or you can insert the bibliography manually, using the paragraph environment
30042 , which is described in the following section (but see also sec.
30043 \begin_inset space ~
30047 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30049 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
30054 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
30055 this document, such as author-year citations, and if you have more than
30056 a handful of references, then you should seriously consider
30060 using a bibliography database.
30063 \begin_layout Standard
30064 In order to demonstrate the difference between these two approaches, we
30065 use two bibliographies in this document, a
30069 environment and a database-generated bibliography.
30070 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
30071 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
30072 In other words, the database approach relieves you, amongst other things,
30073 from the burden to check which entries you have actually cited.
30076 \begin_layout Subsection
30077 The Bibliography Environment
30078 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30080 name "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
30087 \begin_layout Standard
30092 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
30094 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
30103 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
30105 Each entry needs to be given a unique key, which is one word consisting
30106 of ASCII characters only.
30110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30112 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30115 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set"
30121 \begin_inset Newline newline
30125 \begin_inset Flex URL
30128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30130 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set
30140 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
30143 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30147 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30150 , a short form of its title, as the key.
30151 \begin_inset Newline newline
30158 for the entry, references to it will appear with this label instead of
30159 the number of the entry.
30164 in the bibliography items settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
30173 \begin_layout Standard
30174 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
30176 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30179 or the toolbar button
30182 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
30186 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
30187 containing the available citations.
30188 Select one or more keys from the list and
30198 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
30199 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
30203 \begin_layout Standard
30204 Citation references appear in the output as the number or the label of the
30205 bibliography entry with surrounding brackets.
30206 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
30208 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30212 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30218 \begin_layout Standard
30222 Companion Second Edition
30225 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30227 key "latexcompanion"
30235 \begin_layout Standard
30236 The \SpecialChar LyX
30237 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
30238 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30248 \begin_layout Standard
30249 You can also produce author-year or author-number citations, using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30256 \begin_inset Index idx
30259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30268 \change_deleted -712698321 1555659455
30269 the label needs to be given the form
30270 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30274 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30278 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30281 Author A and Author B(Year)
30282 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30289 a blank between the author(s) and the opening parenthesis that delimits
30296 \begin_inset space ~
30301 in the document settings
30302 \begin_inset Index idx
30305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30306 Document ! Settings
30313 Bibliography\SpecialChar menuseparator
30315 \begin_inset space ~
30321 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30323 reference "subsec:Citation-Format"
30331 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660530
30333 Once you have done that, the
30337 dialog has three input fields instead of the
30354 The first one takes the Author list as it should be displayed in the citation
30355 reference, the second the year (without parentheses).
30356 These two are madatory.
30357 If there are multiple authors and you want to both refer to them as a full
30360 Baker, Jones, and Williams
30362 ) and in abrreviated form (
30369 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660544
30370 add the abbreviated form to
30374 and the full list to the optional
30382 \change_inserted -712698321 1555659886
30383 If specified like this,
30385 you can select between different author-year or author-number styles
30386 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660646
30389 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30396 is specified, toggling
30397 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30401 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30404 in the citation dialog or the citation context menu will switch between
30405 full and abbreviated list
30409 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660793
30410 Note that the author and year specified in the dialog are only used for
30411 the citation references.
30412 In the bibliography entry, author and year must be added manually.
30417 \begin_layout Standard
30418 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
30421 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
30423 \begin_inset space ~
30431 arg "layout-paragraph"
30435 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
30438 \begin_layout Subsection
30439 Bibliography databases
30440 \begin_inset Index idx
30443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30444 Bibliography ! Databases
30450 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30452 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
30459 \begin_layout Standard
30460 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same references in different
30465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30466 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
30468 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
30469 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
30474 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
30476 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
30477 your working field in a database.
30478 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
30479 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
30480 list for that document.
30481 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
30485 \begin_layout Standard
30486 The database is a text file with the file extension
30487 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30495 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30498 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
30499 The format is explained in
30500 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30507 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30509 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30511 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
30517 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
30518 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
30519 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
30521 \begin_inset Flex URL
30524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30526 https://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
30534 \begin_layout Standard
30536 supports two different approaches to use bibliography databases in a document.
30537 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30538 is the classic technique that has been the only way to use such databases
30540 It is quite established and mature and there is a huge range of existing
30542 But it has its drawbacks, especially when it comes to more complex bibliographi
30543 c needs and support for specific languages and scripts.
30544 Those are addressed by
30549 \begin_inset Index idx
30552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30554 packages ! biblatex
30560 It reads the same database format than Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30561 (although it has been significantly
30562 extended beyond Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30572 can handle any classic Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30573 database, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30574 might conversely fail to correctly
30575 handle databases that use specific
30584 , but it uses a different framework to generate citations and references
30588 \begin_layout Standard
30589 To select if Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30594 should be used, set in the document settings (menu
30596 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30600 \begin_inset Index idx
30603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30604 Document ! Settings
30616 \begin_inset space ~
30621 to a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30629 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30630 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30632 \begin_inset Index idx
30635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30636 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30645 \begin_layout Standard
30646 To access a database via Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30649 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30650 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
30652 \begin_inset space ~
30658 A window will appear in which you can add one or more databases and select
30659 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30667 Add bibliography to TOC
30669 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
30674 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
30675 in the document or just the cited references.
30677 \change_inserted -712698321 1530969762
30682 drop box lets you specify the encoding of the database(s), should this
30683 differ from the encoding of the document.
30688 \begin_layout Standard
30689 The Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30690 style file is a text file with the file extension
30691 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30699 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30702 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
30703 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
30704 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
30705 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
30707 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
30712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30713 For information on how this is done, have a look at
30714 \begin_inset Newline newline
30718 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30720 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
30730 In this document we used the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30735 , which provides an alpha-numeric style in accordance with the German Standards
30739 \begin_layout Standard
30740 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
30743 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30745 \begin_inset Index idx
30748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30749 Bibliography ! Biblatex
30755 \begin_inset Index idx
30758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30760 packages ! biblatex
30768 \begin_layout Standard
30769 Accessing a database via
30773 is almost identical to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30776 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30777 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
30779 \begin_inset space ~
30785 In contrary to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30786 you cannot select a
30791 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045799
30795 The other dialog options are the same as with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30798 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045867
30799 As for the styles, note the following.
30804 \begin_layout Standard
30809 has two different style files: a bibliography style file (text file with
30811 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30819 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30822 ) controls how the bibliography entries will look like and a citation style
30823 file (text file with the file extension
30824 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30832 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30835 ) controls the look of the citation references in the text.
30836 Usually such style files come in pairs and it makes sense to use matching
30838 It is nevertheless possible to mix any citation style with any bibliography
30842 \begin_layout Standard
30847 styles are not set in the
30850 \begin_inset space ~
30855 dialog, but in the document settings.
30856 \begin_inset Index idx
30859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30860 Document ! Settings
30865 However, in the dialog in the
30869 field, which is only visible if you use
30873 , you can enter options that determine how the bibliography is printed (for
30874 example how its heading will appear).
30875 These options are described in detail in the
30880 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30890 \begin_layout Standard
30891 Inserting a citation reference works as described in section
30892 \begin_inset space ~
30896 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30898 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
30908 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30909 Bibliography Processors
30912 \begin_layout Standard
30913 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
30914 uses a bibliography processor,
30915 that is an external program that reads the database, sorts the citations
30916 and processes the data in a way it can be included in the document.
30917 The classic program is called Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30919 It has the advantage that it is very mature and widespread, but the disadvantag
30920 e that it has severe limitations, due to its age.
30923 \begin_layout Standard
30924 Meanwhile, some alternatives have been developed that address some of these
30926 LyX natively supports some of them and lets you select a custom processor.
30927 You can do this on a general level in
30929 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
30930 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
30931 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
30934 or for individual documents in
30936 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30937 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30941 The following variants are available by default:
30944 \begin_layout Description
30945 biber a specific, modern processor
30946 \begin_inset Index idx
30949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30956 developed exclusively for
30960 (it does not work with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30966 provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory and many specific features
30971 makes use of; if you use the
30975 approach, it is strongly recommended to use
30982 \begin_layout Description
30983 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
30984 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
30985 with all bibliography packages, although it will probably fail with
30989 bibliographies due to the limited memory.
30992 \begin_layout Description
30993 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding
30994 (but no Unicode support), larger memory than
30998 , works with all bibliography packages, although more complex
31002 bibliographies will exceed its limits, and not all
31006 features are supported.
31009 \begin_layout Standard
31010 By default (with the
31016 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31017 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31030 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
31031 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
31032 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
31035 ), \SpecialChar LyX
31036 selects an appropriate (available) processor for the current bibliography
31049 for Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31050 -based bibliography styles).
31051 This should suit most needs.
31054 \begin_layout Standard
31055 In Japanese documents, a specific processor is used.
31056 By default this is pBib\SpecialChar TeX
31057 (in \SpecialChar LyX
31062 ), a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31063 variant specifically aimed at Japanese.
31064 You can adjust it in
31066 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
31067 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
31068 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
31074 \begin_layout Standard
31075 Selected bibliography processors can be controlled with options that you
31076 can add below the selection.
31077 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
31078 of Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31084 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31094 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31098 \begin_layout Standard
31100 supports some specific tasks such as sectioned bibliographies and multiple
31102 These are explained in detail in section
31104 Customizing Bibliographies
31108 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31113 Additional Features
31118 \begin_layout Subsection
31120 \begin_inset Index idx
31123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31124 Bibliography ! Citation format
31130 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31132 name "subsec:Citation-Format"
31139 \begin_layout Standard
31140 Many different citation formats are common, e.
31141 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31145 \begin_inset space \space{}
31148 numerical citation (as
31149 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31153 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31156 like in this document), alpha-numerical citations (as
31157 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31161 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31164 ) or author-year citations (as
31165 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31169 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31174 supports these formats via specific citation packages and their style
31178 \begin_layout Standard
31179 By default a simple numeric citation style is used.
31182 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31183 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31187 \begin_inset Index idx
31190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31191 Document ! Settings
31196 you have a range of other options, depending on your preferred bibliography
31202 environment your only choice besides manual formatting of the bibliography
31203 labels, is there to use
31206 \begin_inset space ~
31217 \begin_inset space ~
31222 which gives you author-year and author-numerical citations (see above
31223 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31225 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
31232 \begin_layout Standard
31233 With a bibliography database (see
31234 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31236 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
31243 ) one has in contrary to the
31247 environment full access to the formatting styles.
31248 These style formats are available:
31251 \begin_layout Description
31253 \begin_inset space ~
31256 (BibTeX) the default Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31257 -based approached without any additional packages
31258 (simple numeric citations).
31261 \begin_layout Description
31262 Biblatex loads the package
31267 \begin_inset Index idx
31270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31272 packages ! biblatex
31277 and lets you select a style in the dropdown boxes
31279 Biblatex citation style
31283 Biblatex bibliography style
31286 Options to the package
31290 can be entered in the
31297 \begin_layout Description
31299 \begin_inset space ~
31303 \begin_inset space ~
31306 mode) loads the package
31310 with the natbib compatibility mode.
31311 This is a specific variant for users who switch an existing document that
31323 behavior very closely.
31328 this option has some additional styles.
31333 styles are also supported by this variant.
31336 \begin_layout Description
31338 \begin_inset space ~
31341 (BibTeX) loads the package
31346 \begin_inset Index idx
31349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31356 which provides author-year styles particularly suited for law studies.
31359 \begin_layout Description
31361 \begin_inset space ~
31364 (BibTeX) loads the package
31369 \begin_inset Index idx
31372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31379 which provides citation styles particularly suited for the humanities.
31382 \begin_layout Standard
31391 style formats provide the choice between author-year and author-numerical
31393 You have to select one style in the dropdown box
31402 formats, this only affects the appearance in the \SpecialChar LyX
31404 Whether the output uses numerical, author-year or another format such as
31405 alpha-numerical depends only on the selected
31407 Biblatex citation style
31410 However, when switching between Author-year and Author-number, a suitable
31416 , on the other hand, the dialog selection will ultimately determine the
31420 \begin_layout Standard
31421 For any author-year and author-numerical selection, multiple style variants
31422 are available in the
31427 Some selections also provide further options like the option to uppercase
31428 a name prefix such as
31429 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31433 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31437 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31441 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31444 ) or to expand or reduce the number of displayed others (i.
31445 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31449 \begin_inset space \space{}
31453 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31457 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31464 \begin_layout Standard
31465 In the citation dialog you can also set text to appear after a citation
31467 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31471 \begin_inset space \space{}
31474 page numbers, which will then be formatted according to the style's needs
31476 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31480 \begin_inset space \space{}
31484 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31488 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31496 in the citation dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
31500 \begin_inset space ~
31508 \begin_inset space ~
31514 Here is a simple example where the text
31515 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31519 \begin_inset space ~
31523 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31526 appears after the reference:
31529 \begin_layout Quote
31531 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31534 key "latexcompanion"
31542 \begin_layout Standard
31543 All styles except for
31547 also provide the feature to add text that precedes the reference (such
31549 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31553 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31557 This text is then also included in the parentheses, if the style requires
31561 \begin_layout Standard
31562 Note that these pre- and postnotes apply to the whole citation.
31563 So if you refer to multiple references at once, the prenote will precede
31564 the first citation in the list, the postnote will follow the last.
31569 styles allow to add pre- and postnotes to any individual reference in a
31570 multi-citation (so-called
31571 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31574 qualified citation lists
31575 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31581 If you use such a style and if the current reference includes multiple
31586 dialog will display three columns in the field
31593 \begin_inset space ~
31601 \begin_inset space ~
31609 \begin_inset space ~
31615 If you double-click on an item's
31618 \begin_inset space ~
31626 \begin_inset space ~
31631 field, you can add such individual pre- and postnotes.
31634 General text before
31640 fields you can add pre- and postnotes that apply to the whole list.
31643 \begin_layout Section
31645 \begin_inset Index idx
31648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31655 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31664 \begin_layout Standard
31665 An index entry is created if you use the menu
31667 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31669 \begin_inset space ~
31674 or the toolbar button
31681 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
31682 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
31683 by \SpecialChar LyX
31684 as the index entry.
31687 \begin_layout Standard
31688 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
31690 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31691 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
31693 \begin_inset space ~
31699 A light blue box labeled
31700 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31708 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31711 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
31712 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
31716 \begin_layout Standard
31717 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
31718 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
31719 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
31720 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31722 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31724 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
31732 \begin_layout Subsection
31733 Grouping Index Entries
31734 \begin_inset Index idx
31737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31746 \begin_layout Standard
31747 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
31749 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
31750 lists under the entry
31751 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31755 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31759 First we create the entry
31760 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31764 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31768 \begin_inset space ~
31772 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31774 reference "subsec:Lists"
31779 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
31780 \begin_inset space ~
31784 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31786 reference "sec:Itemize"
31790 , we insert the command
31793 \begin_layout Standard
31799 \begin_layout Standard
31803 \begin_layout Standard
31809 \begin_layout Standard
31810 for the enumerated list in section
31811 \begin_inset space ~
31815 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31817 reference "sec:Enumerate"
31824 \begin_layout Standard
31825 The exclamation mark
31826 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31830 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31833 marks the grouping levels.
31834 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
31835 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
31836 If we don't have an index entry for
31837 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31841 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31844 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
31847 \begin_layout Subsection
31849 \begin_inset Index idx
31852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31853 Index ! Page ranges
31861 \begin_layout Standard
31862 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
31864 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
31865 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
31866 an index entry in section
31867 \begin_inset space ~
31871 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31873 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
31880 \begin_layout Standard
31883 Paragraph environments|(
31886 \begin_layout Standard
31887 and another entry at the end of section
31888 \begin_inset space ~
31892 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31894 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
31901 \begin_layout Standard
31904 Paragraph environments|)
31907 \begin_layout Standard
31909 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31917 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31921 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31929 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31932 respectively start and end the index range.
31933 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
31934 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
31935 the pages of the indexed document parts.
31936 An example is the index entry
31937 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31940 Document ! Settings
31941 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31947 \begin_layout Subsection
31949 \begin_inset Index idx
31952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31953 Index ! Cross referencing
31961 \begin_layout Standard
31962 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
31963 We referred for example in the index entry
31964 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31968 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31972 \begin_inset space ~
31976 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31978 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
31982 ) to the index entry
31983 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31987 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31990 in the same section using the entry
31993 \begin_layout Standard
31996 GIF|see{Image formats}
31999 \begin_layout Standard
32000 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
32002 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
32003 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
32006 \begin_layout Subsection
32008 \begin_inset Index idx
32011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32012 Index ! Entry order
32020 \begin_layout Standard
32021 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
32022 follow the rules for the index order.
32023 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
32028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32029 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
32031 \begin_inset space ~
32035 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32037 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
32046 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
32047 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
32048 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32052 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32056 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32060 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32064 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32068 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32072 \begin_inset Index idx
32075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32076 Dummy entries ! maïs
32082 \begin_inset Index idx
32085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32086 Dummy entries ! maître
32092 \begin_inset Index idx
32095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32096 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
32101 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
32102 maïs, maison, maître.
32103 To achieve this, we use the command
32106 \begin_layout Standard
32109 previous entry@current entry
32112 \begin_layout Standard
32113 In our case we want to have
32114 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32118 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32122 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32126 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32129 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
32132 \begin_layout Standard
32138 \begin_layout Standard
32139 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
32140 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
32142 See the next subsection for an example.
32145 \begin_layout Subsection
32147 \begin_inset Index idx
32150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32151 Index ! Entry layout
32159 \begin_layout Standard
32160 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
32161 \begin_inset Index idx
32164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32167 This is an italic dummy entry
32172 You can also format the page number using the character
32173 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32177 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32180 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32181 -command without a backslash.
32182 We can write for example
32185 \begin_layout Standard
32188 italic page number:|textit
32191 \begin_layout Standard
32192 to get the page number in italic.
32193 \begin_inset Index idx
32196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32197 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
32202 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
32203 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
32205 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32213 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32221 \begin_inset space ~
32227 Have a look at section
32228 \begin_inset space ~
32232 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32234 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
32238 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32242 \begin_layout Standard
32243 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32251 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
32255 to generate the index, see section
32256 \begin_inset space ~
32260 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32262 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
32271 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
32276 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
32277 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32280 key "latexcompanion"
32293 \begin_layout Standard
32294 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
32296 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
32297 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
32298 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
32299 If so, put the following in the preamble
32302 \begin_layout Standard
32314 \begin_layout Standard
32318 \begin_layout Standard
32324 \begin_layout Standard
32325 in the index entry.
32326 \begin_inset Index idx
32329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32330 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
32335 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
32336 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
32337 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
32340 \begin_layout Standard
32341 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
32342 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
32343 a bold font for all index entries.
32344 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
32356 documentation for details,
32357 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32359 key "makeindex,xindy"
32367 \begin_layout Subsection
32369 \begin_inset Index idx
32372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32379 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32381 name "subsec:Index-Program"
32388 \begin_layout Standard
32389 If the index generation program
32393 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
32394 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
32398 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
32399 distribution, is used.
32403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32408 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
32409 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
32410 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
32411 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
32412 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
32422 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
32424 dialog, see section
32425 \begin_inset space ~
32429 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32431 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
32436 The available options are listed and explained in
32437 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32439 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
32445 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
32449 \begin_layout Standard
32450 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
32451 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
32454 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32455 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32459 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
32460 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
32463 \begin_layout Subsection
32467 \begin_layout Standard
32468 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
32469 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
32470 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32474 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32477 next to the standard index.
32479 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
32480 that add this feature.
32487 \begin_inset Index idx
32490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32492 packages ! splitidx
32497 package to generate multiple indexes.
32498 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
32503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32504 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
32506 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32514 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32515 style, but it also includes
32516 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
32517 Please consult the package's manual for details.
32525 \begin_layout Standard
32526 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
32527 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
32529 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32530 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32533 and select the option
32535 Use multiple Indexes
32542 already contains the standard index
32543 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32547 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32551 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
32552 also appear as a heading) to the
32556 input field and press the
32561 The new index now also appears in the list.
32562 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
32563 label color to the new index.
32566 \begin_layout Standard
32567 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
32570 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32571 List/Contents/References
32577 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
32578 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
32579 are additional features:
32582 \begin_layout Itemize
32583 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
32584 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
32587 \begin_layout Itemize
32588 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
32589 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
32594 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
32595 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
32596 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
32597 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
32600 \begin_layout Itemize
32605 allows to use \SpecialChar TeX
32606 code in the name of the index.
32609 \begin_layout Section
32610 Nomenclature/Glossary
32611 \begin_inset Index idx
32614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32621 \begin_inset Index idx
32624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32653 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32655 name "sec:Nomenclature"
32662 \begin_layout Standard
32663 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
32664 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
32665 called nomenclature or glossary.
32668 \begin_layout Standard
32669 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32676 \begin_inset Index idx
32679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32687 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
32689 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32696 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
32700 \begin_layout Standard
32701 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
32702 and then use the menu
32704 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32710 \begin_inset space ~
32715 or the toolbar button
32718 arg "nomencl-insert"
32723 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32731 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32734 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
32737 \begin_layout Standard
32738 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
32739 The first is the term or
32743 that you wish to define.
32748 of the term or symbol.
32751 \begin_layout Standard
32752 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32760 To use \SpecialChar TeX
32761 code for nomenclature entries the option
32765 in the nomenclature dialog has to be used.
32773 \begin_layout Subsection
32774 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
32775 \begin_inset Index idx
32778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32779 Nomenclature ! Layout
32787 \begin_layout Standard
32788 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
32792 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
32795 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32799 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32803 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32807 \begin_inset Newline newline
32815 \begin_inset Newline newline
32821 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32825 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32828 character starts/ends the formula.
32829 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
32830 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
32832 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32838 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32842 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
32852 \begin_layout Standard
32853 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32854 syntax is given in section
32855 \begin_inset space ~
32859 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32861 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
32868 \begin_layout Standard
32872 \begin_inset space ~
32877 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
32879 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
32880 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32884 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32888 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32891 in this document is:
32892 \begin_inset Newline newline
32897 dummy entry for the character
32902 \begin_inset Newline newline
32914 \begin_inset space ~
32924 font use the command
32953 \begin_layout Standard
32954 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
32955 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32959 \begin_inset space \space{}
32963 \begin_inset Newline newline
32979 \begin_inset Newline newline
32982 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
32983 This command will make the font of all symbols
32990 \begin_inset space ~
32998 \begin_layout Standard
32999 If the characters |
33000 \begin_inset space \space{}
33004 \begin_inset space \space{}
33008 \begin_inset space \space{}
33012 \begin_inset space \space{}
33016 \begin_inset space \space{}
33019 should appear in nomenclature entries containing \SpecialChar TeX
33020 code they need to be escaped
33021 by adding a quote character in front of them.
33022 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
33023 LatexCommand nomenclature
33024 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
33025 description "The quote sign in TeX code is output by writing ' \"\" '."
33033 \begin_layout Subsection
33034 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
33035 \begin_inset Index idx
33038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33039 Nomenclature ! Sort order
33047 \begin_layout Standard
33048 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33049 -code of the symbol
33051 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
33053 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
33056 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
33057 LatexCommand nomenclature
33059 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
33067 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33071 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
33072 LatexCommand nomenclature
33075 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
33081 They will be sorted by
33082 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33090 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33094 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33104 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33108 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33111 will be sorted before the
33115 since the character
33116 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33120 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33123 is considered in sorting.
33126 \begin_layout Standard
33127 To control the sort order, you can edit the
33130 \begin_inset space ~
33135 field of the nomenclature dialog.
33136 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
33138 For the example given, you can insert
33142 in this field for the
33143 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33150 will be located before
33151 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33157 \begin_layout Standard
33158 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
33163 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33173 \begin_layout Subsection
33174 Nomenclature Options
33175 \begin_inset Index idx
33178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33179 Nomenclature ! Options
33185 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33187 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
33194 \begin_layout Standard
33199 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
33200 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
33203 \begin_layout Description
33204 refeq Appends the phrase
33205 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33217 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33220 to every nomenclature entry, where
33226 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
33229 \begin_layout Description
33230 refpage Appends the phrase
33231 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33243 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33246 to every nomenclature entry, where
33252 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
33255 \begin_layout Description
33256 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
33259 \begin_layout Standard
33260 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
33261 class options list in the
33263 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33267 In this document the options
33274 \begin_layout Standard
33275 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
33281 \begin_layout Standard
33282 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
33283 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
33288 field in the nomenclature dialog:
33291 \begin_layout Description
33301 \begin_layout Description
33304 nomrefpage Like the
33311 \begin_layout Description
33314 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
33323 \begin_layout Description
33327 \begin_inset space ~
33333 \begin_inset space ~
33338 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
33341 \begin_layout Standard
33343 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33347 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33350 are automatically translated for most document languages.
33351 If not, add these lines in front of the nomenclature list as \SpecialChar TeX
33355 \begin_layout Standard
33364 \begin_inset Newline newline
33370 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
33373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33374 \begin_inset space ~
33386 unskip, see equation
33389 \begin_inset Newline newline
33396 pagedeclaration}[1]{
33397 \begin_inset Newline newline
33403 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
33406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33407 \begin_inset space ~
33424 \begin_layout Standard
33425 If the numbers should be hyperlinks, assure that you use
33428 \begin_inset space ~
33433 in the document settings under
33436 \begin_inset space ~
33444 \begin_layout Standard
33452 \begin_inset Newline newline
33456 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
33459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33460 \begin_inset space ~
33472 hyperlink{equation.#1}{equation
33474 nobreakspace{}(#1)}}
33475 \begin_inset Newline newline
33482 pagedeclaration}[1]{
33483 \begin_inset Newline newline
33487 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
33490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33491 \begin_inset space ~
33503 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
33508 \begin_layout Subsection
33509 Printing the Nomenclature
33510 \begin_inset Index idx
33513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33514 Nomenclature ! Printing
33522 \begin_layout Standard
33523 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
33525 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33526 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
33531 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33539 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33542 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
33543 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
33544 You can choose between these settings:
33547 \begin_layout Description
33548 Default a space of 1
33549 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33555 \begin_layout Description
33557 \begin_inset space ~
33561 \begin_inset space ~
33564 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
33567 \begin_layout Description
33568 Custom custom space
33571 \begin_layout Standard
33572 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
33573 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33577 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33581 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
33589 For example, in order to change the name to
33593 , add the following line to the preamble:
33596 \begin_layout Standard
33609 nomname{List of Symbols}}}
33612 \begin_layout Standard
33613 When you are using another document language than English, replace
33614 \begin_inset Newline newline
33629 , where *** is the name of the language used.
33632 \begin_layout Subsection
33633 Nomenclature Program
33634 \begin_inset Index idx
33637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33638 Nomenclature ! Program
33644 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33646 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
33653 \begin_layout Standard
33659 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
33660 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
33662 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
33667 by adding options, see section
33668 \begin_inset space ~
33672 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33674 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
33679 The available options are listed and explained in
33680 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33682 key "nomencl,makeindex"
33690 \begin_layout Section
33692 \begin_inset Index idx
33695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33702 \begin_inset Index idx
33705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33706 Document ! Branches
33712 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33714 name "sec:Branches"
33721 \begin_layout Standard
33722 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
33723 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
33724 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
33725 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
33728 \begin_layout Standard
33729 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
33730 allows you to put text into branches.
33731 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
33732 To create a branch, either select the menu
33734 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33735 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
33738 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
33740 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33747 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
33748 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
33749 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
33750 and whether the name of the branch should
33751 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
33752 (see below for an example).
33753 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
33754 to the name of the other) and to add
33755 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33759 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33763 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33767 \begin_inset space ~
33770 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
33771 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
33774 \begin_layout Standard
33775 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
33776 These boxes are inserted via the menu
33778 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33781 where you can choose a branch.
33782 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
33786 \begin_layout Standard
33787 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
33788 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
33791 \begin_layout Standard
33792 \begin_inset Branch Question
33796 \begin_layout Standard
33801 Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
33809 \begin_layout Standard
33810 \begin_inset Branch Answer
33814 \begin_layout Standard
33819 Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
33827 \begin_layout Standard
33834 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33835 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33838 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
33839 Consider for example a file
33840 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33844 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33847 which has the above branches.
33849 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33853 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33856 is active, the PDF export file would be called
33857 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33861 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33865 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33869 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33873 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33877 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33880 branch were inactive,
33881 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33885 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33889 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33893 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33896 branch was active, likewise
33897 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33901 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33905 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33909 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33912 branch was active, and
33913 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33916 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
33917 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33920 if both branches were active.
33921 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
33922 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
33928 \begin_layout Standard
33929 There are also inverted branch insets, whose content is output just in case
33935 This make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
33936 To control whether a particular inset is inverted, right-click on the inset
33940 \begin_inset space ~
33948 \begin_layout Standard
33949 \begin_inset Branch Answer
33953 \begin_layout Standard
33959 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33963 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33966 branch is deactivated.
33972 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
33978 \begin_layout Standard
33979 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
33980 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
33981 definitions for each branch.
33982 For example you can define for the question branch
33986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33987 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33988 -syntax, see section
33989 \begin_inset space ~
33993 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33995 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
34007 \begin_layout Standard
34017 \begin_layout Standard
34027 \begin_layout Standard
34028 and for the answer branch
34031 \begin_layout Standard
34041 \begin_layout Standard
34051 \begin_layout Standard
34052 \begin_inset Branch Question
34056 \begin_layout Standard
34060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34088 \begin_layout Standard
34089 \begin_inset Branch Answer
34093 \begin_layout Standard
34097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34125 \begin_layout Standard
34126 Now it is possible to use the
34130 question{\SpecialChar ldots
34137 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
34140 commands to obtain conditional output.
34141 Here is an example formula where only the
34148 \begin_inset Formula
34150 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
34158 \begin_layout Standard
34159 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
34167 \begin_layout Standard
34168 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
34170 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34174 \begin_inset space \space{}
34177 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
34179 For this advanced usage, see the
34185 Flex insets and InsetLayout
34190 \begin_layout Section
34192 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34194 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
34199 \begin_inset Index idx
34202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34211 \begin_layout Standard
34214 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34215 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34218 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
34220 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34226 \begin_inset Index idx
34229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34231 packages ! hyperref
34236 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
34237 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
34238 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
34239 part of the document.
34243 \begin_layout Standard
34244 The header information in the dialog tab
34248 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
34249 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
34250 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
34251 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
34255 \begin_inset space ~
34259 \begin_inset space ~
34264 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
34265 tries to extract the header information from your document title
34266 and author entries.
34270 \begin_inset space ~
34274 \begin_inset space ~
34278 \begin_inset space ~
34283 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
34286 \begin_layout Standard
34287 You can specify in the dialog tab
34291 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
34296 \begin_inset space ~
34300 \begin_inset space ~
34304 \begin_inset space ~
34309 option allows long links to be split;
34312 \begin_inset space ~
34316 \begin_inset space ~
34320 \begin_inset space ~
34328 \begin_inset space ~
34333 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
34336 \begin_inset space ~
34341 colors the different links.
34342 The default colors are:
34345 \begin_layout Labeling
34346 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
34351 for hyperlinks and URLs
34354 \begin_layout Labeling
34355 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
34363 \begin_layout Labeling
34364 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
34372 \begin_layout Standard
34373 but you can change these in the field
34378 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
34381 \begin_layout Standard
34384 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
34387 \begin_layout Standard
34392 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
34393 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
34394 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
34397 \begin_layout Standard
34402 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
34403 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
34404 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
34414 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
34415 when opening the PDF.
34417 \begin_inset space ~
34420 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
34421 \begin_inset space ~
34424 1 will only display the sections.
34427 \begin_layout Standard
34428 PDF properties are also used in this document.
34429 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
34435 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
34436 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34446 \begin_layout Section
34448 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34450 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34452 name "sec:TeX-Code"
34459 \begin_layout Subsection
34462 \begin_inset Index idx
34465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34473 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34475 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
34482 \begin_layout Standard
34483 As \SpecialChar LyX
34484 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
34485 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
34486 commands and constructs,
34489 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
34490 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
34491 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
34492 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
34493 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
34494 cannot support all packages and
34498 \begin_layout Standard
34499 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
34500 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
34501 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
34505 Code box is created by the menu
34507 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34509 \begin_inset space ~
34514 or by the toolbar button
34527 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
34535 \begin_layout Standard
34536 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
34538 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
34540 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word
34544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34545 The LyX way would be to use a framed box.
34550 and are therefore using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34557 , you can write the command part
34563 in a \SpecialChar TeX
34564 Code box before the word and the closing brace
34568 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
34569 Code box behind the word.
34570 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
34571 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
34575 \begin_layout Standard
34576 \begin_inset Graphics
34577 filename clipart/ERT.png
34585 \begin_layout Standard
34589 \begin_layout Standard
34590 This is a line with a
34594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34617 \begin_layout Standard
34618 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34626 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
34627 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
34628 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
34629 know that the command is finished.
34637 \begin_layout Subsection
34638 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34640 \begin_inset Argument 1
34643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34644 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
34651 \begin_inset Index idx
34654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34662 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34664 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
34671 \begin_layout Standard
34672 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
34673 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34674 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
34675 uses in the background.
34676 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
34677 is based on commands, you can
34678 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34682 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34686 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
34687 any time if you know the right commands.
34688 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
34689 is the end of the day.
34690 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
34691 all caption labels bold.
34692 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
34694 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
34698 \begin_layout Standard
34699 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
34701 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
34703 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34706 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34716 \begin_layout Standard
34717 As result you find that the package
34722 \begin_inset Index idx
34725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34733 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
34735 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34738 \SpecialChar menuseparator
34742 \begin_inset space ~
34750 \begin_layout Standard
34755 usepackage[options]{package name}
34758 \begin_layout Standard
34759 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
34760 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
34761 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
34762 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
34765 \begin_layout Standard
34766 In your case the package name is
34771 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
34776 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
34777 So you add the command
34780 \begin_layout Standard
34785 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
34788 \begin_layout Standard
34789 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
34793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34794 For more commands provided by the
34798 package, have a look at its documentation,
34799 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34814 \begin_layout Standard
34815 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
34817 For example if you use a
34821 class, you don't need the package
34825 , you can instead write
34828 \begin_layout Standard
34833 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
34838 \begin_layout Standard
34839 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
34840 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
34841 documentation of the document class you want to use.
34848 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
34851 \begin_layout Standard
34852 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
34853 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
34855 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
34856 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
34857 Code box as described in the previous
34861 \begin_layout Standard
34862 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
34863 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34866 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34868 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
34876 \begin_layout Standard
34877 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
34883 \begin_layout Standard
34887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34897 \begin_inset Note Note
34900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34901 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
34909 \begin_layout Left Header
34910 \begin_inset Argument 1
34913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34933 \begin_inset Note Note
34936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34937 defines the header line as described below
34945 \begin_layout Center Header
34946 \begin_inset Argument 1
34949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34958 \begin_layout Right Header
34959 \begin_inset Argument 1
34962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34983 \begin_layout Left Footer
34984 \begin_inset Argument 1
34987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35008 \begin_layout Center Footer
35009 \begin_inset Argument 1
35012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35024 \begin_inset Newline newline
35028 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
35034 \begin_layout Right Footer
35035 \begin_inset Argument 1
35038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35060 \begin_layout Section
35061 Customized Page Headers and Footers
35062 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35064 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
35069 \begin_inset Index idx
35072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35073 Document ! Header/Footer line
35079 \begin_inset Index idx
35082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35091 \begin_layout Standard
35092 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
35096 \begin_inset space ~
35107 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35113 \begin_inset space ~
35119 As a second step add in the menu
35121 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35122 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35126 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35131 Custom Header/Footerlines
35134 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35138 This module offers the following 6
35139 \begin_inset space ~
35145 \begin_layout Description
35147 \begin_inset space ~
35151 \begin_inset space ~
35155 \begin_inset space ~
35159 \begin_inset space ~
35163 \begin_inset space ~
35169 \begin_layout Description
35171 \begin_inset space ~
35175 \begin_inset space ~
35179 \begin_inset space ~
35183 \begin_inset space ~
35187 \begin_inset space ~
35193 \begin_layout Standard
35194 for the different positions in the header/footer.
35195 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
35198 \begin_layout Standard
35199 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
35200 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
35202 \begin_inset space ~
35206 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35208 reference "fig:Page-layout"
35212 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
35215 \begin_layout Standard
35216 \begin_inset Float figure
35223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35226 \begin_inset Tabular
35227 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
35228 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
35229 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
35230 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
35231 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
35233 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35242 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
35245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35251 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35262 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35271 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35280 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35291 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
35294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35295 The normal text on the page goes here.
35296 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
35298 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
35299 the chapter, company logo but you can use almost anything, except of floats.
35304 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35313 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35324 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35333 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35342 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35353 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35362 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
35365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35371 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35389 \begin_inset Caption Standard
35391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35392 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35394 name "fig:Page-layout"
35398 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
35411 \begin_layout Standard
35412 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35420 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
35424 \begin_inset space ~
35429 is set to “Default”.
35430 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
35439 \begin_layout Subsection
35443 \begin_layout Standard
35444 To define your header line, add all three header environments.
35445 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages, the
35446 things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
35447 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
35449 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty, nothing appears
35451 Defining the footer line works similarly.
35454 \begin_layout Standard
35455 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
35456 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
35460 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35462 \begin_inset space ~
35470 \begin_layout Description
35473 thepage prints the current page number
35476 \begin_layout Description
35479 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
35482 \begin_layout Description
35485 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
35488 \begin_layout Description
35491 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
35492 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
35495 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35499 \begin_inset Quotes prd
35502 because it usually goes in a left header.
35505 \begin_layout Description
35508 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
35509 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
35511 It is normally used in the right header.
35514 \begin_layout Subsection
35515 Default header/footer
35518 \begin_layout Standard
35519 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
35520 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
35521 footer has the page number.
35522 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
35523 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
35524 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
35527 \begin_inset space ~
35535 \begin_layout Subsection
35539 \begin_layout Standard
35540 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
35541 Some pages are different.
35542 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own, and so does
35543 any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
35544 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
35545 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
35546 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
35549 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35550 Header and footer decoration line
35553 \begin_layout Standard
35554 By default, you get a 0.4
35555 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35558 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
35559 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
35571 in the following way:
35574 \begin_layout Standard
35581 headrulewidth}{thickness}
35584 \begin_layout Standard
35585 where thickness is a size in standard units like
35598 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
35599 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35605 \begin_layout Standard
35606 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
35608 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
35609 \begin_inset space ~
35613 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35623 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35624 Several header/footer lines
35627 \begin_layout Standard
35628 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
35629 this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
35630 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the height of
35632 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35647 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35648 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35650 \begin_inset space ~
35658 \begin_layout Standard
35665 headheight}{height}
35668 \begin_layout Standard
35673 is a size in standard units (e.
35674 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35678 \begin_inset space \space{}
35686 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height, define your
35687 header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
35688 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35689 logfile with the menu
35691 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35693 \begin_inset space ~
35701 \begin_inset space ~
35706 to see if you can find a warning about the package
35711 \begin_inset Index idx
35714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35716 packages ! fancyhdr
35722 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
35723 for your header/footer.
35726 \begin_layout Subsection
35730 \begin_layout Standard
35731 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
35732 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
35733 This example consists of the following definition:
35736 \begin_layout Description
35738 \begin_inset space ~
35747 , empty optional argument
35750 \begin_layout Description
35752 \begin_inset space ~
35755 Header empty, empty optional argument
35758 \begin_layout Description
35760 \begin_inset space ~
35769 in the optional argument
35772 \begin_layout Description
35774 \begin_inset space ~
35783 in the optional argument
35786 \begin_layout Description
35788 \begin_inset space ~
35801 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35805 \begin_inset Newline newline
35809 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
35813 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35816 in the optional argument
35819 \begin_layout Description
35821 \begin_inset space ~
35830 , empty optional argument
35833 \begin_layout Description
35836 headrulewidth set to 2
35837 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35843 \begin_layout Standard
35844 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
35845 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
35851 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35861 \begin_layout Standard
35862 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
35868 \begin_layout Standard
35872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35876 pagestyle{headings}
35882 \begin_inset Note Note
35885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35886 switches back to page style with the default headings
35894 \begin_layout Section
35895 Previewing Snippets of your Document
35896 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35898 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
35903 \begin_inset Index idx
35906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35913 \begin_inset Index idx
35916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35925 \begin_layout Standard
35927 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
35928 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
35929 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
35932 \begin_layout Subsection
35936 \begin_layout Standard
35937 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35943 \begin_inset Index idx
35946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35948 packages ! preview-latex
35953 (on some systems named simply
35958 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
35960 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35967 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
35969 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
35977 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
35978 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35979 -package are automatically
35980 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
35984 \begin_layout Subsection
35988 \begin_layout Standard
35989 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
35990 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
35992 activate the option
35995 \begin_inset space ~
36002 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36008 \begin_inset space ~
36012 \begin_inset space ~
36015 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
36022 \begin_inset space ~
36035 \begin_inset space ~
36040 is the multiplication factor for the size.
36043 \begin_layout Standard
36044 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
36049 \begin_inset space ~
36057 \begin_inset space ~
36065 \begin_layout Standard
36066 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
36067 and when you finish
36071 \begin_layout Standard
36072 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36080 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
36081 generated by activating the option
36084 \begin_inset space ~
36090 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
36098 \begin_layout Subsection
36099 Selected document parts
36102 \begin_layout Standard
36103 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
36104 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
36105 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
36106 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
36108 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
36110 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36114 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
36115 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
36116 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
36119 \begin_layout Standard
36120 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36127 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
36132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36139 is explained in section
36141 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
36146 \begin_inset space ~
36156 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
36157 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
36158 the final rotated boxes,
36159 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
36160 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
36162 Here is the result:
36165 \begin_layout Standard
36166 \begin_inset Preview
36168 \begin_layout Standard
36173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36177 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
36183 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
36193 height_special "totalheight"
36198 backgroundcolor "none"
36201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36226 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
36232 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
36239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36254 \begin_layout Standard
36255 Previewing works also for colors.
36256 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36275 is explained in section
36282 \begin_inset space ~
36295 \begin_layout Standard
36296 \begin_inset Preview
36298 \begin_layout Standard
36302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36321 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
36326 This is text within a colored, framed box.
36330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36345 \begin_layout Standard
36346 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
36352 \begin_layout Standard
36353 If \SpecialChar LyX
36354 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
36355 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
36356 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
36357 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36358 packages in your document preamble that are required by
36359 the \SpecialChar TeX
36361 If \SpecialChar LyX
36362 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
36363 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
36365 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
36366 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
36367 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
36370 \begin_layout Subsection
36375 \begin_layout Standard
36376 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36377 source of the whole document or parts of it.
36380 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
36382 \begin_inset space ~
36387 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36389 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
36391 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
36392 's main window, then only this selection
36393 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
36394 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
36395 the source view window.
36400 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
36401 ; but note that if you have
36402 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
36404 not just the one which is open at the time.
36407 \begin_layout Section
36408 Advanced Find and Replace
36409 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36411 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
36416 \begin_inset Index idx
36419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36426 \begin_inset Index idx
36429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36438 \begin_layout Subsection
36442 \begin_layout Standard
36443 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
36444 allows for searching of complex,
36445 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
36447 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
36448 The key-features are:
36451 \begin_layout Itemize
36452 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
36453 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
36454 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
36458 \begin_layout Itemize
36459 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
36460 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
36461 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
36462 a section heading will only be found within section headings
36465 \begin_layout Itemize
36466 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
36467 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
36468 outside of mathematics environments
36471 \begin_layout Itemize
36472 Search may be widened to a specific
36477 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36481 \begin_inset space ~
36484 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
36485 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
36492 \begin_layout Itemize
36493 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
36494 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
36495 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36499 \begin_inset space ~
36502 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
36505 \begin_layout Subsection
36509 \begin_layout Standard
36510 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
36512 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
36525 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
36528 ) or the toolbar button
36531 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
36537 Advanced Find and Replace
36542 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36546 \begin_layout Standard
36552 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
36556 \begin_inset space ~
36561 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
36564 arg "paragraph-break"
36568 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
36569 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
36573 arg "paragraph-break"
36576 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
36580 searches backwards.
36583 \begin_layout Standard
36587 \begin_inset space ~
36592 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
36601 \begin_inset space ~
36606 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
36609 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36610 Searching for mathematics
36613 \begin_layout Standard
36614 Mathematical formulas, such as
36615 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
36618 or something more complex like
36619 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
36622 , may be searched for by typing them in the
36627 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
36628 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
36629 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
36630 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
36636 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36640 \begin_layout Standard
36641 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
36642 This is done by switching to the
36646 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
36651 This way, entering in the
36658 \begin_layout Itemize
36659 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
36660 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
36663 \begin_layout Itemize
36664 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
36665 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
36668 \begin_layout Itemize
36669 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
36670 of it only within section headings.
36671 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
36672 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
36676 \begin_layout Itemize
36677 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
36678 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
36681 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36685 \begin_layout Standard
36686 The entries made in the
36690 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
36693 \begin_inset space ~
36699 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
36703 button or alternatively press
36706 arg "paragraph-break"
36713 while the cursor is in the
36716 \begin_inset space ~
36724 \begin_layout Standard
36725 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
36727 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
36731 \begin_layout Itemize
36732 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
36733 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
36734 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36738 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36741 with its typewriter version
36742 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36750 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36756 \begin_layout Itemize
36757 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
36759 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36763 \begin_inset Formula $R$
36767 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36771 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36775 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
36779 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36782 (you may want to enable the
36785 \begin_inset space ~
36793 \begin_inset space ~
36798 options and disable the
36806 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
36807 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36811 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36814 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
36815 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
36819 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
36822 , or occurrences of
36823 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
36827 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
36833 \begin_layout Subsection
36837 \begin_layout Standard
36838 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
36842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36843 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
36845 \begin_inset CommandInset href
36847 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
36857 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
36863 This is done with the context menu
36865 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36866 Insert Regular Expression
36868 while the cursor is in the
36873 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
36874 expression matching rules
36878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36879 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
36882 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36886 \begin_inset space ~
36889 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
36890 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
36896 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
36897 same text in the document.
36898 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
36899 Examples of using such a feature may be:
36902 \begin_layout Enumerate
36903 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
36908 editor the fraction
36909 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
36913 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
36916 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
36917 fractions with the given denominator.
36920 \begin_layout Enumerate
36921 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
36933 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
36938 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
36939 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
36940 Also, by inserting a
36941 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
36944 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
36945 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
36948 \begin_layout Standard
36949 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
36950 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
36951 \begin_inset Formula $()$
36954 , and referring back to them through
36955 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
36959 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
36963 For example, try searching with the regexp
36964 \begin_inset Newline newline
36967 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
36970 \begin_inset Newline newline
36973 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
36976 \begin_layout Standard
36977 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
36980 \begin_layout Standard
36981 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36989 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
36990 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
36991 sub-expressions is absolute.
36993 \begin_inset space ~
36997 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
37000 always refers to the first occurrence of
37001 \begin_inset Formula $()$
37004 in all entered regexps.
37012 \begin_layout Section
37014 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37016 name "sec:Spellchecking"
37021 \begin_inset Index idx
37024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37033 \begin_layout Standard
37035 has a built-in spell checker.
37038 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37045 key or the toolbar button
37048 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
37051 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
37052 beginning of the currently selected text.
37053 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
37054 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
37055 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
37056 scrolled so that it is visible.
37057 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
37058 n, if any could be found.
37059 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
37063 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
37064 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
37067 \begin_layout Standard
37068 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
37071 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37075 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
37076 a different one at the top of the dialog.
37078 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
37079 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
37082 \begin_inset space ~
37090 arg "dialog-show character"
37093 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
37095 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
37098 \begin_layout Standard
37099 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
37100 can be downloaded from here:
37101 \begin_inset Newline newline
37105 \begin_inset Flex URL
37108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37110 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
37116 \begin_inset Newline newline
37120 \begin_inset space ~
37123 files for each language.
37124 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
37125 \begin_inset space ~
37128 files into \SpecialChar LyX
37129 's installation subfolder
37137 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
37139 \begin_inset Newline newline
37142 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
37143 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
37144 but in most cases these are
37160 is the language code.
37163 \begin_layout Subsection
37167 \begin_layout Standard
37170 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37171 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37173 \begin_inset space ~
37176 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37179 you can set the following things:
37182 \begin_layout Description
37184 \begin_inset space ~
37187 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
37188 should use for spell checking.
37189 Depending on your platform,
37199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37200 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
37201 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
37216 \begin_inset space ~
37219 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
37222 \begin_layout Description
37224 \begin_inset space ~
37227 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
37228 will always use the given language
37229 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
37232 \begin_layout Description
37234 \begin_inset space ~
37237 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
37239 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37243 \begin_inset space \space{}
37247 This should normally not be needed.
37250 \begin_layout Description
37252 \begin_inset space ~
37256 \begin_inset space ~
37259 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
37261 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37265 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37271 \begin_layout Description
37273 \begin_inset space ~
37276 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
37277 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
37278 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
37279 appear in a context menu.
37280 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
37284 \begin_layout Description
37286 \begin_inset space ~
37290 \begin_inset space ~
37294 \begin_inset space ~
37297 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
37301 \begin_layout Section
37303 \begin_inset Index idx
37306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37313 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37315 name "sec:Thesaurus"
37322 \begin_layout Standard
37324 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
37325 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
37334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37335 \begin_inset CommandInset href
37337 target "https://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
37347 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
37349 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
37350 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
37351 which are available for many languages.
37354 \begin_layout Standard
37355 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
37356 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
37360 \begin_layout Subsection
37361 Setting up the thesaurus
37364 \begin_layout Standard
37373 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
37377 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
37382 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
37384 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37388 \begin_inset space ~
37396 For instance, the US English files are named:
37399 \begin_layout Itemize
37403 \begin_layout Itemize
37407 \begin_layout Standard
37416 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
37417 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
37420 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37421 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37422 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
37424 \begin_inset space ~
37429 ) to the path where they are installed.
37433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37434 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
37435 ies, typical locations are
37441 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
37445 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
37449 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
37452 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
37458 LibreOffice-<Version>
37465 On the Mac, the default location is
37467 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
37468 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
37469 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
37470 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
37471 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
37472 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
37480 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
37481 during the \SpecialChar LyX
37482 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
37486 \begin_layout Standard
37487 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
37488 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
37490 \begin_inset Newline newline
37494 \begin_inset Flex URL
37497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37499 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/thesaurus/
37507 \begin_layout Standard
37508 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
37509 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
37511 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37512 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37513 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
37515 \begin_inset space ~
37520 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
37522 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
37523 and point \SpecialChar LyX
37527 \begin_layout Standard
37528 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
37530 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
37533 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
37539 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
37542 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
37543 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
37545 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37551 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37552 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37553 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
37555 \begin_inset space ~
37560 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
37563 \begin_layout Subsection
37564 Using the thesaurus
37567 \begin_layout Standard
37568 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
37570 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37573 or the toolbar button
37576 arg "thesaurus-entry"
37579 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
37581 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
37583 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
37584 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
37585 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
37594 ), related terms (such as
37597 \begin_inset space ~
37606 ), compounds (such as
37609 \begin_inset space ~
37618 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
37627 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
37630 \begin_layout Standard
37631 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
37632 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
37636 \begin_layout Standard
37637 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
37638 the dictionary, such as the above
37642 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
37643 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37647 \begin_inset space \space{}
37650 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
37651 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
37652 For example, looking up the word form
37656 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
37661 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
37662 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37666 \begin_inset space \space{}
37677 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
37678 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
37679 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
37682 \begin_layout Section
37684 \begin_inset Index idx
37687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37694 \begin_inset Index idx
37697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37698 Document ! Change Tracking
37704 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37706 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
37713 \begin_layout Standard
37714 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
37715 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
37716 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
37717 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
37719 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37721 \begin_inset space ~
37724 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37726 \begin_inset space ~
37734 \begin_layout Standard
37735 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
37749 The color depends on the author that made the change.
37750 You can change the color in
37752 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37753 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37755 \begin_inset space ~
37759 \begin_inset space ~
37764 \SpecialChar menuseparator
37770 \begin_inset Index idx
37773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37774 Color ! Change tracking
37779 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
37780 's status bar when the
37781 cursor is in changed text.
37782 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
37785 arg "changes-merge"
37791 \begin_layout Standard
37792 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
37794 \begin_inset Index idx
37797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37806 \begin_layout Standard
37807 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37813 \begin_layout Standard
37814 \begin_inset Graphics
37815 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
37823 \begin_layout Standard
37824 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37830 \begin_layout Standard
37831 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
37834 \begin_layout Standard
37835 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37841 \begin_layout Standard
37842 \begin_inset Tabular
37843 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
37844 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
37845 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
37846 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
37847 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37848 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37856 arg "changes-track"
37864 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37870 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37872 \begin_inset space ~
37875 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37877 \begin_inset space ~
37886 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37887 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37895 arg "changes-output"
37903 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37909 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37911 \begin_inset space ~
37914 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37916 \begin_inset space ~
37920 \begin_inset space ~
37924 \begin_inset space ~
37933 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37934 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37950 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37954 Jumps to the next change
37960 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37961 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37969 arg "change-accept"
37977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37983 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37985 \begin_inset space ~
37988 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37990 \begin_inset space ~
37999 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38000 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38008 arg "change-reject"
38016 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38022 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38024 \begin_inset space ~
38027 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38029 \begin_inset space ~
38038 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38047 arg "changes-merge"
38055 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38061 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38063 \begin_inset space ~
38066 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38068 \begin_inset space ~
38077 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38078 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38086 arg "all-changes-accept"
38094 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38100 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38102 \begin_inset space ~
38105 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38107 \begin_inset space ~
38111 \begin_inset space ~
38120 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38121 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38129 arg "all-changes-reject"
38137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38143 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38145 \begin_inset space ~
38148 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38150 \begin_inset space ~
38154 \begin_inset space ~
38163 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38186 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38187 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
38189 \begin_inset space ~
38198 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38199 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38221 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
38223 \begin_inset space ~
38239 \begin_layout Standard
38240 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38246 \begin_layout Standard
38247 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
38267 \begin_layout Standard
38268 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
38269 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
38270 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
38271 the next change after the current cursor position.
38272 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
38273 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
38274 step to the next change.
38275 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
38278 \begin_layout Standard
38279 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
38280 to describe a change.
38283 \begin_layout Standard
38285 \change_deleted -712698321 1577206802
38286 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38292 \begin_inset Index idx
38295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38303 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
38305 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
38312 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
38318 \begin_layout Section
38319 Comparison of Documents
38320 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38322 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
38327 \begin_inset Index idx
38330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38331 Comparison of documents
38339 \begin_layout Standard
38340 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
38343 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38347 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
38348 file with change tracking enabled showing the
38350 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
38352 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
38356 \begin_inset space ~
38360 \begin_inset space ~
38364 \begin_inset space ~
38373 \begin_inset space ~
38377 \begin_inset space ~
38381 \begin_inset space ~
38385 \begin_inset space ~
38389 \begin_inset space ~
38393 \begin_inset space ~
38398 enables the change tracking option
38401 \begin_inset space ~
38405 \begin_inset space ~
38409 \begin_inset space ~
38414 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
38417 \begin_layout Section
38418 International Support
38419 \begin_inset Index idx
38422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38423 International support
38431 \begin_layout Standard
38432 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
38433 with any language you want.
38434 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
38435 up \SpecialChar LyX
38437 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
38439 key "Arabic,Armenian,Cyrillic,Farsi,Hebrew,Japanese"
38447 \begin_layout Standard
38448 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
38449 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
38450 \begin_inset space ~
38454 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38456 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
38463 \begin_layout Subsection
38465 \begin_inset Index idx
38468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38475 \begin_inset Index idx
38478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38479 Document ! Settings
38485 \begin_inset Index idx
38488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38489 Document ! Language
38497 \begin_layout Standard
38500 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38501 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38504 dialog lets you set
38506 the language, the quote style and character encoding
38511 \begin_layout Standard
38516 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
38521 \begin_inset space ~
38526 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
38527 For details about the different encoding options see section
38528 \begin_inset space ~
38532 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38534 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
38541 \begin_layout Subsection
38542 Keyboard mapping configuration
38543 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38545 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
38552 \begin_layout Standard
38553 If you have for example a U.
38554 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38557 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
38558 can use an alternate keymap.
38559 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
38564 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38565 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38566 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
38569 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
38570 \begin_inset space ~
38574 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38576 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
38581 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
38582 which one you want to use.
38585 \begin_layout Standard
38586 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
38587 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
38588 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
38589 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38592 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
38593 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
38594 one to support the characters you want.
38595 This and many other customizations are explained in the
38602 \begin_layout Chapter
38605 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38607 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
38614 \begin_layout Standard
38615 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
38616 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
38617 topic inside the user's guide.
38620 \begin_layout Section
38622 \begin_inset Index idx
38625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38634 \begin_layout Standard
38639 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
38642 \begin_layout Subsection
38646 \begin_layout Standard
38647 Creates a new document.
38650 \begin_layout Subsection
38654 \begin_layout Standard
38655 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
38656 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
38657 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
38659 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353209
38660 Furthermore, templates can provide text structures and fragments for recurring
38666 \begin_layout Subsection
38670 \begin_layout Standard
38674 \begin_layout Subsection
38678 \begin_layout Standard
38679 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
38680 Click there on a file to open it.
38683 \begin_layout Subsection
38685 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352812
38689 \begin_layout Standard
38691 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352848
38692 This menu entry gives you quick access to all \SpecialChar LyX
38696 \begin_layout Subsection
38700 \begin_layout Standard
38701 Closes the current document.
38704 \begin_layout Subsection
38708 \begin_layout Standard
38709 Closes all opened documents.
38712 \begin_layout Subsection
38716 \begin_layout Standard
38717 Saves the actual document.
38720 \begin_layout Subsection
38724 \begin_layout Standard
38725 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
38726 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352868
38730 \begin_layout Subsection
38732 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352875
38736 \begin_layout Standard
38738 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352904
38739 Saves the document in the appropriate templates directory for later use
38745 \begin_layout Subsection
38749 \begin_layout Standard
38750 Saves all opened documents.
38753 \begin_layout Subsection
38757 \begin_layout Standard
38758 Reloads the actual document from disk.
38761 \begin_layout Subsection
38765 \begin_layout Standard
38766 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
38767 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
38768 It is described in the section
38770 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
38775 Additional Features
38780 \begin_layout Subsection
38784 \begin_layout Standard
38785 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
38786 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
38788 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
38789 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
38793 \begin_layout Standard
38794 When using the menu entry
38797 \begin_inset space ~
38802 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
38806 \begin_inset space ~
38810 \begin_inset space ~
38814 \begin_inset space ~
38819 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
38820 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
38823 \begin_layout Subsection
38825 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38827 name "subsec:Export"
38834 \begin_layout Standard
38835 You can export your document to various file formats.
38836 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
38838 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
38839 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
38840 during its configuration.
38843 \begin_layout Standard
38844 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
38846 \begin_inset space ~
38850 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38852 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
38859 \begin_layout Description
38865 \begin_inset space ~
38868 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
38870 \begin_inset space ~
38873 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
38874 \begin_inset Newline newline
38877 Since \SpecialChar LyX
38878 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
38882 \begin_layout Description
38883 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
38889 \begin_layout Description
38891 \begin_inset space ~
38894 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
38900 \begin_layout Description
38901 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
38902 's native DVI-format.
38903 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
38904 files paths or file names in your document.
38906 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
38913 \begin_layout Description
38914 DVI DVI-format that also allows the usage of special characters or spaces
38915 in files paths or file names
38918 \begin_layout Description
38920 \begin_inset space ~
38927 ) DVI-format using the program
38929 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
38932 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
38936 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38944 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
38952 \begin_layout Description
38954 \begin_inset space ~
38957 (cropped) the same as
38961 but with cropped page margins.
38964 \begin_layout Description
38966 \begin_inset space ~
38969 Dot text file with code in the programming language
38973 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
38978 \begin_layout Description
38982 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38990 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
38998 \begin_layout Description
39000 \begin_inset space ~
39004 \begin_inset space ~
39007 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
39011 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
39019 \begin_layout Description
39023 \begin_inset space ~
39032 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39033 source that is compilable with the program
39035 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
39039 \begin_layout Description
39043 \begin_inset space ~
39048 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39049 source, additionally all images used in the document
39050 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
39054 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
39057 \begin_layout Description
39061 \begin_inset space ~
39066 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39067 source code, additionally all images used in the document
39068 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
39076 \begin_layout Description
39080 \begin_inset space ~
39089 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39090 source that is compilable with the program
39096 \begin_layout Description
39098 \begin_inset space ~
39102 \begin_inset space ~
39109 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39110 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
39116 \begin_layout Description
39118 \begin_inset space ~
39121 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
39122 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
39124 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39128 \begin_inset space \space{}
39133 \begin_inset space ~
39137 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39141 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39145 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39149 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39152 represent the version number)
39155 \begin_layout Description
39157 \begin_inset space ~
39161 \begin_inset space ~
39164 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
39165 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
39166 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
39170 \begin_layout Description
39171 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
39172 's internal XHTML engine
39175 \begin_layout Description
39177 \begin_inset space ~
39181 \begin_inset space ~
39185 \begin_inset space ~
39189 \begin_inset space ~
39192 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
39197 For the conversion the program
39206 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
39209 \begin_layout Description
39210 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
39215 \begin_layout Description
39217 \begin_inset space ~
39220 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
39222 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
39225 For the conversion the program
39234 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
39237 \begin_layout Description
39239 \begin_inset space ~
39242 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
39243 For the conversion the program
39252 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
39255 \begin_layout Description
39257 \begin_inset space ~
39260 (cropped) the same as
39263 \begin_inset space ~
39268 but with cropped page margins
39271 \begin_layout Description
39275 \begin_inset space ~
39280 PDF-format using the program
39284 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
39287 \begin_layout Description
39291 \begin_inset space ~
39295 \begin_inset space ~
39303 \begin_inset space ~
39308 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
39309 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39313 \begin_inset space \space{}
39316 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
39320 \begin_layout Description
39324 \begin_inset space ~
39329 PDF-format using the program
39331 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
39334 , produces PDF-files directly
39337 \begin_layout Description
39341 \begin_inset space ~
39346 PDF-format using the program
39350 , produces PDF-files directly
39353 \begin_layout Description
39357 \begin_inset space ~
39362 PDF-format using the program
39366 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
39369 \begin_layout Description
39373 \begin_inset space ~
39378 PDF-format using the program
39383 , produces PDF-files directly
39386 \begin_layout Description
39390 \begin_inset space ~
39398 \begin_layout Description
39402 \begin_inset space ~
39406 \begin_inset space ~
39411 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
39412 and then exported as text using the program
39417 \begin_layout Description
39422 PostScript format using the program
39430 options see section
39431 \begin_inset space ~
39435 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39437 reference "subsec:General-output"
39444 \begin_layout Description
39445 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39446 source and also code in the statistical programming
39460 it is possible to use
39464 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
39468 \begin_layout Standard
39469 If one of the menu entries
39476 \begin_inset space ~
39485 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
39487 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
39489 \begin_inset space ~
39493 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39495 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
39500 \begin_inset Index idx
39503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39504 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
39513 \begin_layout Subsection
39517 \begin_layout Standard
39518 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
39519 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
39522 \begin_inset space ~
39526 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39528 reference "sec:Paths"
39533 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
39542 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
39543 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
39544 's preferences as described in section
39545 \begin_inset space ~
39549 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39551 reference "subsec:Converters"
39558 \begin_layout Subsection
39559 New and Close Window
39562 \begin_layout Standard
39563 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
39567 \begin_layout Subsection
39571 \begin_layout Standard
39572 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
39575 \begin_layout Section
39577 \begin_inset Index idx
39580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39589 \begin_layout Subsection
39593 \begin_layout Standard
39594 Described in section
39595 \begin_inset space ~
39599 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39601 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
39608 \begin_layout Subsection
39609 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
39612 \begin_layout Standard
39613 Described in section
39614 \begin_inset space ~
39618 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39620 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
39627 \begin_layout Subsection
39631 \begin_layout Standard
39632 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
39633 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
39636 \begin_layout Subsection
39640 \begin_layout Standard
39641 Selects the whole document.
39644 \begin_layout Subsection
39645 Find & Replace (Quick)
39648 \begin_layout Standard
39649 Described in section
39650 \begin_inset space ~
39654 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39656 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
39663 \begin_layout Subsection
39664 Find & Replace (Advanced)
39667 \begin_layout Standard
39668 Described in section
39669 \begin_inset space ~
39673 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39675 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
39682 \begin_layout Subsection
39683 Move Paragraph Up/Down
39686 \begin_layout Standard
39687 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
39691 \begin_layout Subsection
39693 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
39697 \begin_layout Standard
39699 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
39700 Described in section
39701 \begin_inset space ~
39705 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39707 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
39716 \begin_layout Subsection
39718 \begin_inset Index idx
39721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39722 Paragraph ! Settings
39730 \begin_layout Standard
39731 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
39732 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
39736 \begin_layout Standard
39737 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
39738 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
39744 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39745 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39747 \begin_inset space ~
39753 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756614
39757 \begin_layout Subsection
39759 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756624
39763 \begin_layout Standard
39765 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
39766 This sub-menu provides several ways to customize the appearance of text
39771 \begin_layout Enumerate
39773 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756657
39774 Customize text properties by means of the
39780 Customize\SpecialChar ldots
39783 ; this is described in section
39784 \begin_inset space ~
39788 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39790 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
39797 \begin_layout Enumerate
39799 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756942
39800 Apply the last settings done in this dialog via
39802 Apply last settings
39805 \begin_layout Enumerate
39807 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
39808 Change the casing of selected text (
39823 \begin_layout Subsection
39825 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756641
39829 \begin_layout Standard
39831 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756787
39832 This sub-menu only appears the document class or a module provides custom
39833 text styles (in the case of this document:
39855 \begin_inset space ~
39859 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39861 reference "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
39870 \begin_layout Subsection
39871 Table and Rows & Columns
39874 \begin_layout Standard
39875 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
39876 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
39877 of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
39880 \begin_layout Subsection
39884 \begin_layout Standard
39885 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
39886 It will dissolve this inset.
39887 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
39891 \begin_layout Subsection
39895 \begin_layout Standard
39896 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
39897 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
39900 \begin_layout Subsection
39901 Increase/Decrease List Depth
39904 \begin_layout Standard
39905 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
39907 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
39908 \begin_inset space ~
39912 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39914 reference "sec:Nesting"
39919 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39921 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
39928 \begin_layout Section
39930 \begin_inset Index idx
39933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39942 \begin_layout Standard
39943 At the bottom of the
39947 menu the opened documents are listed.
39950 \begin_layout Subsection
39951 Open/Close all Insets
39954 \begin_layout Standard
39955 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
39958 \begin_layout Subsection
39959 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
39962 \begin_layout Standard
39963 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
39966 \begin_layout Standard
39967 Math macros are described in the
39974 \begin_layout Subsection
39978 \begin_layout Standard
39979 Shows the outline window as described in sections
39980 \begin_inset space ~
39984 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39986 reference "sec:Navigating"
39991 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39993 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
40000 \begin_layout Subsection
40004 \begin_layout Standard
40005 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
40007 \begin_inset space ~
40011 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40013 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
40020 \begin_layout Subsection
40024 \begin_layout Standard
40025 Opens a window showing console messages.
40026 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
40028 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40031 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
40032 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
40033 is processing the document.
40036 \begin_layout Subsection
40038 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40040 name "subsec:Toolbars"
40045 \begin_inset Index idx
40048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40057 \begin_layout Standard
40058 In this menu entry you can set the icon size and the appearance of the different
40060 All toolbars and the
40063 \begin_inset space ~
40068 can be turned on and off.
40073 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
40085 \begin_inset space ~
40097 \begin_inset space ~
40102 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
40106 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
40113 \begin_layout Standard
40118 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
40122 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
40123 or when a certain feature is enabled.
40124 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
40125 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
40126 is inside a formula or table respectively.
40129 \begin_layout Standard
40131 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
40132 \begin_inset space ~
40136 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40138 reference "sec:Toolbars"
40145 \begin_layout Subsection
40149 \begin_layout Standard
40153 \begin_inset space ~
40157 \begin_inset space ~
40161 \begin_inset space ~
40165 \begin_inset space ~
40169 \begin_inset space ~
40173 \begin_inset space ~
40178 will split \SpecialChar LyX
40179 's main window vertically while
40182 \begin_inset space ~
40186 \begin_inset space ~
40190 \begin_inset space ~
40194 \begin_inset space ~
40198 \begin_inset space ~
40202 \begin_inset space ~
40207 will split it horizontally.
40208 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
40209 to view the same document, but at different positions.
40210 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
40211 three or more documents at the same time.
40212 To close a split view, use the menu
40215 \begin_inset space ~
40219 \begin_inset space ~
40227 \begin_layout Subsection
40231 \begin_layout Standard
40232 Closes a split view.
40235 \begin_layout Subsection
40239 \begin_layout Standard
40240 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
40241 so that you will see nothing but your text.
40242 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
40243 's main window fullscreen.
40244 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
40245 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
40248 \begin_layout Section
40250 \begin_inset Index idx
40253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40262 \begin_layout Subsection
40266 \begin_layout Standard
40267 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
40268 \begin_inset space ~
40272 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40274 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
40285 \begin_layout Subsection
40287 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40289 name "subsec:Special-Character"
40296 \begin_layout Standard
40297 Here you can insert the following characters:
40300 \begin_layout Description
40305 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
40308 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
40309 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40310 -packages you have installed.
40311 You can get a complete display by checking
40314 \begin_inset space ~
40320 \begin_inset Newline newline
40324 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
40327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40332 Not all characters will be visible in the
40336 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
40337 dialog (see section
40338 \begin_inset space ~
40342 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40344 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
40348 ) can display every character.
40356 \begin_layout Description
40357 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
40361 \begin_layout Description
40363 \begin_inset space ~
40367 \begin_inset space ~
40370 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
40371 \begin_inset space ~
40375 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40377 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
40384 \begin_layout Description
40386 \begin_inset space ~
40389 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
40392 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40393 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40399 \begin_layout Description
40401 \begin_inset space ~
40404 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
40407 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40408 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40414 \begin_layout Description
40416 \begin_inset space ~
40419 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
40423 \begin_layout Description
40425 \begin_inset space ~
40428 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
40432 \begin_layout Description
40434 \begin_inset space ~
40437 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
40443 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
40449 \begin_layout Description
40451 \begin_inset space ~
40454 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
40458 \begin_layout Description
40460 \begin_inset space ~
40464 \begin_inset Index idx
40467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40474 \begin_inset Index idx
40477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40478 Language ! Phonetic symbols
40483 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
40484 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
40486 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40492 \begin_inset Index idx
40495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40503 \begin_inset Newline newline
40506 More information about this feature can be found in the
40512 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
40518 \begin_layout Description
40519 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
40521 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
40522 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
40526 \begin_layout Subsection
40530 \begin_layout Standard
40531 Opens a submenu with the following options:
40534 \begin_layout Description
40535 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
40536 \begin_inset script superscript
40538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40547 \begin_layout Description
40548 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
40549 \begin_inset script subscript
40551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40560 \begin_layout Description
40562 \begin_inset space ~
40565 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
40566 \begin_inset space ~
40570 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40572 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
40579 \begin_layout Description
40581 \begin_inset space ~
40584 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
40585 \begin_inset space ~
40589 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40591 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
40598 \begin_layout Description
40600 \begin_inset space ~
40603 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
40604 \begin_inset space ~
40608 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40610 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
40617 \begin_layout Description
40619 \begin_inset space ~
40622 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
40624 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40628 \begin_inset space \space{}
40631 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
40632 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
40638 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40641 To insert a fraction use the command
40646 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
40650 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
40656 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40659 The visible space is hereby the character before the
40666 \begin_layout Description
40668 \begin_inset space ~
40671 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
40672 \begin_inset space ~
40676 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40678 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
40685 \begin_layout Description
40687 \begin_inset space ~
40690 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
40691 \begin_inset space ~
40695 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40697 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
40704 \begin_layout Description
40706 \begin_inset space ~
40709 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
40710 \begin_inset space ~
40714 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40716 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
40723 \begin_layout Description
40724 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
40725 \begin_inset space ~
40729 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40731 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
40738 \begin_layout Description
40740 \begin_inset space ~
40743 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
40744 \begin_inset space ~
40748 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40750 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
40757 \begin_layout Description
40759 \begin_inset space ~
40762 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
40763 \begin_inset space ~
40767 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40769 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
40776 \begin_layout Description
40778 \begin_inset space ~
40782 \begin_inset space ~
40785 Break Inserts a line break point (zero-width space character) that is invisible
40788 \begin_inset space ~
40792 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40794 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
40801 for a usage example.
40804 \begin_layout Description
40806 \begin_inset space ~
40810 \begin_inset space ~
40813 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
40814 \begin_inset space ~
40818 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40820 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
40827 \begin_layout Description
40829 \begin_inset space ~
40832 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
40833 as described in section
40834 \begin_inset space ~
40838 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40840 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
40847 \begin_layout Description
40849 \begin_inset space ~
40852 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
40853 \begin_inset space ~
40857 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40859 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
40866 \begin_layout Description
40868 \begin_inset space ~
40871 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
40872 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
40874 \begin_inset space ~
40878 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40880 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
40887 \begin_layout Description
40889 \begin_inset space ~
40892 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
40893 \begin_inset space ~
40897 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40899 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
40906 \begin_layout Description
40908 \begin_inset space ~
40912 \begin_inset space ~
40915 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
40916 \begin_inset space ~
40920 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40922 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
40929 \begin_layout Subsection
40931 \change_inserted -712698321 1533459357
40935 \begin_layout Standard
40937 \change_inserted -712698321 1533459959
40938 Here you can insert fields holding specific information.
40939 The submenu allows you to insert
40942 \begin_layout Description
40944 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460018
40946 \begin_inset space ~
40949 (Current) inserts the current date (which will automatically update itself)
40952 \begin_layout Description
40954 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460347
40956 \begin_inset space ~
40960 \begin_inset space ~
40963 Modification) inserts the date of the last file modification (time of last
40967 \begin_layout Description
40969 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647074
40971 \begin_inset space ~
40974 (Fix) inserts a static date that will not change.
40977 \begin_layout Description
40979 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647089
40981 \begin_inset space ~
40984 (Current) inserts the current time (which will automatically update itself)
40987 \begin_layout Description
40989 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647093
40991 \begin_inset space ~
40995 \begin_inset space ~
40998 Modification) inserts the time of the last file modification (time of last
41002 \begin_layout Description
41004 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647133
41006 \begin_inset space ~
41009 (Fix) inserts a static time that will not change.
41012 \begin_layout Description
41014 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647170
41016 \begin_inset space ~
41020 \begin_inset space ~
41024 \begin_inset space ~
41027 Extension) inserts the name of the current file (without the extension .lyx)
41030 \begin_layout Description
41032 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647240
41034 \begin_inset space ~
41037 Name inserts the user name as specified in
41039 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41040 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41046 \begin_layout Description
41048 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647259
41050 \begin_inset space ~
41053 Email inserts the user email address as specified in
41055 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41056 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41062 \begin_layout Description
41064 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460561
41065 Other\SpecialChar ldots
41066 opens a dialog that lets you insert alternative formats of the three
41067 date types listed above and insert a range of other information.
41070 \begin_layout Subsection
41073 List/Contents/References
41076 \begin_layout Standard
41077 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
41081 \begin_inset space ~
41102 are described in section
41103 \begin_inset space ~
41107 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41109 reference "sec:toc"
41118 is described in section
41119 \begin_inset space ~
41123 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41125 reference "sec:Index"
41133 is described in section
41134 \begin_inset space ~
41138 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41140 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
41146 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
41149 is described in section
41150 \begin_inset space ~
41154 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41156 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
41163 \begin_layout Subsection
41167 \begin_layout Standard
41168 To insert floats, as described in section
41169 \begin_inset space ~
41173 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41175 reference "sec:Floats"
41179 and in detail the chapter
41186 \begin_inset space ~
41194 \begin_layout Subsection
41198 \begin_layout Standard
41199 To insert notes, described in section
41200 \begin_inset space ~
41204 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41206 reference "sec:Notes"
41213 \begin_layout Subsection
41217 \begin_layout Standard
41218 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
41220 Branches are described in section
41221 \begin_inset space ~
41225 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41227 reference "sec:Branches"
41234 \begin_layout Subsection
41238 \begin_layout Standard
41239 Inserts document class-specific insets.
41240 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
41242 An example is the document class
41243 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354540
41245 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41253 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354543
41257 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41262 with three custom insets.
41265 Flex insets and InsetLayout
41269 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
41275 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
41278 \begin_layout Subsection
41280 \begin_inset Index idx
41283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41292 \begin_layout Standard
41293 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
41295 For more information see chapter
41297 External Document Parts
41300 \begin_inset space ~
41306 \begin_layout Subsection
41308 \begin_inset Index idx
41311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41320 \begin_layout Standard
41321 Inserts a box in a certain style.
41322 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
41329 \begin_inset space ~
41337 \begin_layout Subsection
41341 \begin_layout Standard
41346 dialog as described in section
41347 \begin_inset space ~
41351 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41353 reference "sec:Bibliography"
41360 \begin_layout Subsection
41364 \begin_layout Standard
41369 as described in section
41370 \begin_inset space ~
41374 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41376 reference "sec:Cross-References"
41383 \begin_layout Subsection
41387 \begin_layout Standard
41392 as described in section
41393 \begin_inset space ~
41397 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41399 reference "sec:Cross-References"
41406 \begin_layout Subsection
41408 \begin_inset Index idx
41411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41418 \begin_inset Index idx
41421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41422 Tables ! Multi-page ! Caption
41430 \begin_layout Standard
41431 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
41432 Floats are described in section
41433 \begin_inset space ~
41437 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41439 reference "sec:Floats"
41443 ; captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
41445 Multi-page Captions
41450 \begin_inset space ~
41458 \begin_layout Subsection
41462 \begin_layout Standard
41463 Inserts an index entry as described in section
41464 \begin_inset space ~
41468 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41470 reference "sec:Index"
41477 \begin_layout Subsection
41481 \begin_layout Standard
41482 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
41483 \begin_inset space ~
41487 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41489 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
41496 \begin_layout Subsection
41500 \begin_layout Standard
41501 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
41502 Tables are described in section
41503 \begin_inset space ~
41507 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41509 reference "sec:Tables"
41513 and in detail in the chapter
41520 \begin_inset space ~
41528 \begin_layout Subsection
41532 \begin_layout Standard
41538 Graphics are described in section
41539 \begin_inset space ~
41543 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41545 reference "sec:Graphics"
41552 \begin_layout Subsection
41556 \begin_layout Standard
41557 Inserts a URL as described in section
41558 \begin_inset space ~
41562 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41564 reference "subsec:URLs"
41571 \begin_layout Subsection
41575 \begin_layout Standard
41576 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
41577 \begin_inset space ~
41581 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41583 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
41590 \begin_layout Subsection
41594 \begin_layout Standard
41595 Inserts a footnote as described in section
41596 \begin_inset space ~
41600 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41602 reference "sec:Footnotes"
41609 \begin_layout Subsection
41613 \begin_layout Standard
41614 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
41615 \begin_inset space ~
41619 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41621 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
41628 \begin_layout Subsection
41631 Separate <Name> (Above/Below)
41634 \begin_layout Standard
41635 These menu items are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive
41636 environments of the same type.
41638 \begin_inset space ~
41642 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41644 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
41648 for an explanation.
41651 \begin_layout Subsection
41655 \begin_layout Standard
41656 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
41657 title or caption of a float.
41658 Inserts a short title as described in section
41659 \begin_inset space ~
41663 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41665 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
41672 \begin_layout Subsection
41677 \begin_layout Standard
41678 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
41679 Code box as described in section
41680 \begin_inset space ~
41684 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41686 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
41693 \begin_layout Subsection
41695 \begin_inset Index idx
41698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41707 \begin_layout Standard
41708 Inserts a program listings box.
41709 Program listings are explained in the chapter
41711 Program Code Listings
41716 \begin_inset space ~
41724 \begin_layout Subsection
41726 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
41730 \begin_layout Standard
41732 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
41733 Inserts the actual date.
41734 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
41741 \begin_layout Subsection
41745 \begin_layout Standard
41746 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
41747 \begin_inset space ~
41751 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41753 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
41760 \begin_layout Section
41762 \begin_inset Index idx
41765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41774 \begin_layout Standard
41775 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
41776 \begin_inset space ~
41779 of the current document.
41780 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
41783 \begin_layout Subsection
41787 \begin_layout Standard
41788 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
41789 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
41790 to jump, for example, between section
41791 \begin_inset space ~
41795 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
41796 \begin_inset space ~
41799 2.5 and use the submenu
41802 \begin_inset space ~
41806 \begin_inset space ~
41813 \begin_inset space ~
41819 \begin_inset space ~
41823 \begin_inset space ~
41829 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
41833 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
41839 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
41842 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
41845 \begin_layout Standard
41846 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
41850 \begin_inset space ~
41855 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
41858 \begin_inset space ~
41863 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
41866 \begin_layout Subsection
41867 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
41870 \begin_layout Standard
41871 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
41875 \begin_layout Subsection
41879 \begin_layout Standard
41880 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
41881 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
41882 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
41886 \begin_inset space ~
41890 \begin_inset space ~
41898 \begin_layout Subsection
41902 \begin_layout Standard
41903 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
41906 The \SpecialChar LyX
41907 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
41909 \begin_inset space ~
41917 \begin_inset space ~
41922 manual for a detailed description.
41925 \begin_layout Section
41927 \begin_inset Index idx
41930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41939 \begin_layout Subsection
41943 \begin_layout Standard
41944 Change Tracking is described in section
41945 \begin_inset space ~
41949 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41951 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
41958 \begin_layout Subsection
41966 \begin_layout Standard
41967 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
41968 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
41969 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41971 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
41972 to the clipboard or update the view.
41973 \begin_inset Newline newline
41976 With the help of the logfile, experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
41980 \begin_layout Standard
41983 Open Containing Directory
41985 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
41986 's temporary folder for the document.
41987 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
41988 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems
41989 or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
41990 For example some journals require to send the
41994 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
41998 \begin_layout Subsection
41999 Start Appendix Here
42002 \begin_layout Standard
42003 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
42004 as described in section
42005 \begin_inset space ~
42009 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42011 reference "sec:Appendices"
42018 \begin_layout Subsection
42020 \begin_inset space ~
42026 \begin_layout Standard
42027 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
42028 default output format for the document (menu
42030 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42031 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42032 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
42034 \begin_inset space ~
42038 \begin_inset space ~
42044 \begin_inset space ~
42048 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42050 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
42054 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
42057 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42058 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42060 \begin_inset space ~
42063 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42065 \begin_inset space ~
42068 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
42070 \begin_inset space ~
42074 \begin_inset space ~
42080 \begin_inset space ~
42084 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42086 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42090 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
42091 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
42093 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42094 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42096 \begin_inset space ~
42099 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42101 \begin_inset space ~
42104 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
42108 \begin_inset space ~
42112 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42114 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42119 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
42120 when it is first configured.
42121 The default output format is
42124 \begin_inset space ~
42132 \begin_layout Subsection
42133 View (Other Formats)
42136 \begin_layout Standard
42137 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
42138 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
42139 actual document with an external program.
42140 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
42141 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42142 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
42144 All possible formats are listed in section
42145 \begin_inset space ~
42149 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42151 reference "subsec:Export"
42156 You should at least see the menu entry
42161 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
42163 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
42165 \begin_inset space ~
42169 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42171 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
42176 \begin_inset Index idx
42179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42180 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
42189 \begin_layout Standard
42190 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
42191 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
42193 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42194 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42196 \begin_inset space ~
42199 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42201 \begin_inset space ~
42204 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
42208 \begin_inset space ~
42212 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42214 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42219 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
42220 when it is first configured.
42223 \begin_layout Subsection
42225 \begin_inset space ~
42231 \begin_layout Standard
42232 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
42233 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
42236 \begin_layout Subsection
42237 Update (Other Formats)
42240 \begin_layout Standard
42241 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
42242 your document without opening a new viewer window.
42245 \begin_layout Subsection
42246 View Master Document
42249 \begin_layout Standard
42250 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
42252 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42256 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42266 \begin_inset space ~
42271 manual for more information on this topic).
42272 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
42273 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
42277 \begin_inset space ~
42281 \begin_inset space ~
42286 generates the output of the whole book, while
42290 will just output the chapter alone.
42293 \begin_layout Standard
42294 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
42295 in the document settings (menu
42297 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42298 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42299 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
42301 \begin_inset space ~
42305 \begin_inset space ~
42311 \begin_inset space ~
42315 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42317 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
42321 ) or in the preferences (menu
42323 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42324 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42326 \begin_inset space ~
42329 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42331 \begin_inset space ~
42334 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
42336 \begin_inset space ~
42340 \begin_inset space ~
42346 \begin_inset space ~
42350 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42352 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42359 \begin_layout Subsection
42360 Update Master Document
42363 \begin_layout Standard
42364 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
42366 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42370 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42380 \begin_inset space ~
42385 manual for more information on this topic).
42386 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
42387 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
42390 \begin_layout Standard
42391 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
42392 in the document settings (menu
42394 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42395 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42396 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
42398 \begin_inset space ~
42402 \begin_inset space ~
42408 \begin_inset space ~
42412 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42414 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
42418 ) or in the preferences (menu
42420 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42421 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42423 \begin_inset space ~
42426 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42428 \begin_inset space ~
42431 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
42433 \begin_inset space ~
42437 \begin_inset space ~
42443 \begin_inset space ~
42447 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42449 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42456 \begin_layout Subsection
42458 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42460 name "subsec:Compressed"
42467 \begin_layout Standard
42468 Un/compresses the current document.
42469 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
42470 compression (see the
42472 Additional Features
42474 manual for details).
42477 \begin_layout Subsection
42481 \begin_layout Standard
42482 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
42485 \begin_layout Subsection
42489 \begin_layout Standard
42490 The document settings are described in appendix
42491 \begin_inset space ~
42495 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42497 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
42504 \begin_layout Section
42506 \begin_inset Index idx
42509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42518 \begin_layout Subsection
42522 \begin_layout Standard
42523 Spell checking is explained in section
42524 \begin_inset space ~
42528 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42530 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
42537 \begin_layout Subsection
42541 \begin_layout Standard
42542 The thesaurus is described in section
42543 \begin_inset space ~
42547 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42549 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
42556 \begin_layout Subsection
42558 \begin_inset Index idx
42561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42568 \begin_inset Index idx
42571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42580 \begin_layout Standard
42581 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
42582 the highlighted document part.
42585 \begin_layout Subsection
42591 \begin_inset Index idx
42594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42595 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
42604 \begin_layout Standard
42605 Generates with the help of the program
42607 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
42610 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
42611 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
42612 This feature is not available on Windows.
42615 \begin_layout Subsection
42621 \begin_inset Index idx
42624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42634 \begin_layout Standard
42635 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
42640 \begin_inset space ~
42645 to see the full filename paths.
42648 \begin_layout Subsection
42650 \begin_inset Index idx
42653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42662 \begin_layout Standard
42663 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
42664 files as described in section
42665 \begin_inset space ~
42669 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42671 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
42678 \begin_layout Subsection
42680 \begin_inset Index idx
42683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42696 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
42701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42714 \begin_inset Index idx
42717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42718 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
42727 \begin_layout Standard
42728 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
42729 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
42730 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
42731 -packages and programs it needs; see
42733 \begin_inset space ~
42737 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42739 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
42746 \begin_layout Subsection
42750 \begin_layout Standard
42755 dialog as described in detail in appendix
42756 \begin_inset space ~
42760 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42762 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
42769 \begin_layout Section
42771 \begin_inset Index idx
42774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42783 \begin_layout Standard
42784 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
42785 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
42787 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
42791 \begin_layout Standard
42795 \begin_inset space ~
42800 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
42801 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42802 packages and classes found
42803 by \SpecialChar LyX
42805 \begin_inset space ~
42809 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42811 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
42818 \begin_layout Standard
42822 \begin_inset space ~
42827 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
42832 \begin_layout Section
42834 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42836 name "sec:Toolbars"
42843 \begin_layout Standard
42844 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
42845 \begin_inset space ~
42849 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42851 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
42858 \begin_layout Standard
42859 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
42860 This is described in the
42862 Additional Features
42867 \begin_layout Subsection
42869 \begin_inset Index idx
42872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42881 \begin_layout Standard
42882 \begin_inset Graphics
42883 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
42891 \begin_layout Standard
42892 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42898 \begin_layout Standard
42899 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
42904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42916 \begin_inset Note Note
42919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42920 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
42925 manual for more information.
42933 \begin_layout Standard
42934 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42940 \begin_layout Standard
42941 \begin_inset Tabular
42942 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
42943 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
42944 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
42945 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
42947 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42951 \begin_inset Graphics
42952 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
42962 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42966 pull-down box for the environments
42979 \begin_layout Standard
42980 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
42986 \begin_layout Standard
42988 \begin_inset Tabular
42989 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="24" columns="2">
42990 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
42991 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42992 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42993 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42994 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43010 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43016 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
43023 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43024 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43040 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43046 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
43053 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43054 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43070 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43076 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
43083 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43084 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43092 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
43100 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43106 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43113 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43114 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43122 arg "spelling-continuously"
43130 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43134 Spellcheck continuously
43140 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43141 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43157 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43163 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43170 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43187 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43193 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43200 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43223 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43230 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43231 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43247 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43253 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43260 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43261 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43277 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43283 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43285 \change_inserted -712698321 1545905310
43290 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43299 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43300 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43308 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
43316 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43322 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43324 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43328 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43332 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43341 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43342 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43348 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
43356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43362 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43364 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43368 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43372 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43381 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43382 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43390 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
43398 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43404 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
43405 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
43412 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43433 Emphasize text, function of the
43434 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758222
43437 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43439 \begin_inset space ~
43442 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
43444 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758222
43450 arg "dialog-show character"
43461 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43462 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43482 Set text to noun style, function of the
43483 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758226
43486 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43488 \begin_inset space ~
43491 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
43493 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758226
43499 arg "dialog-show character"
43510 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43511 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43516 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900859
43519 arg "dynamic-char-styles"
43527 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43532 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900930
43535 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43542 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43543 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43548 \change_deleted -712698321 1545899987
43553 arg "textstyle-apply"
43563 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43568 \change_deleted -712698321 1545900001
43569 Format text using the current settings in the
43571 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43573 \begin_inset space ~
43576 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
43587 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43588 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43604 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43610 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43611 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
43613 \begin_inset space ~
43622 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43623 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43631 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
43639 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43645 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43652 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43653 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43659 arg "tabular-insert"
43667 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43673 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43680 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43681 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43686 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900837
43689 arg "dynamic-custom-insets"
43697 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43702 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900953
43705 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43712 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43721 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
43729 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43733 Toggle outline window on/off,
43735 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
43742 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43743 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43751 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
43759 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43763 Toggle math toolbar on/off
43769 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43778 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
43786 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43790 Toggle table toolbar on/off
43803 \begin_layout Subsection
43805 \begin_inset Index idx
43808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43817 \begin_layout Standard
43818 \begin_inset Graphics
43819 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
43827 \begin_layout Standard
43828 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
43834 \begin_layout Standard
43835 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
43839 \begin_layout Standard
43840 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
43846 \begin_layout Standard
43847 \begin_inset Tabular
43848 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="26" columns="2">
43849 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
43850 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
43851 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
43852 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43853 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43869 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43879 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43880 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43888 arg "layout-toggle Enumerate"
43896 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43906 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43907 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43915 arg "layout-toggle Itemize"
43923 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43933 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43934 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43942 arg "layout-toggle List"
43950 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43960 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43961 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43969 arg "layout-toggle Description"
43977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43987 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43996 arg "depth-increment"
44004 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44010 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44012 \begin_inset space ~
44016 \begin_inset space ~
44025 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44034 arg "depth-decrement"
44042 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44048 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44050 \begin_inset space ~
44054 \begin_inset space ~
44063 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44064 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44072 arg "float-insert figure"
44080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44086 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44087 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
44094 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44103 arg "float-insert table"
44111 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44117 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44118 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
44125 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44126 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44142 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44148 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44155 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44164 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
44172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44178 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44185 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44186 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44194 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
44202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44208 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44215 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44216 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44232 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44238 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44240 \begin_inset space ~
44249 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44250 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44258 arg "nomencl-insert"
44266 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44272 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44274 \begin_inset space ~
44283 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44284 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44292 arg "footnote-insert"
44300 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44306 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44313 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44322 arg "marginalnote-insert"
44330 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44336 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44338 \begin_inset space ~
44347 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44348 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44364 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44370 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44371 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
44373 \begin_inset space ~
44382 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44383 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44391 arg "box-insert Frameless"
44399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44405 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44412 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44435 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44442 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44443 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44465 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44467 \begin_inset space ~
44476 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44477 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44485 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
44493 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44499 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44500 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
44507 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44508 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44516 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
44524 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44530 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44531 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44533 \begin_inset space ~
44542 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44543 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44551 arg "dialog-show character"
44559 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44565 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44567 \begin_inset space ~
44570 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
44577 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44578 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44583 \change_inserted -712698321 1545899981
44588 arg "textstyle-apply"
44596 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44601 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900045
44602 Format text using the recent settings in the
44605 arg "dialog-show character"
44614 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44615 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44623 arg "layout-paragraph"
44631 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44637 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44639 \begin_inset space ~
44648 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44649 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44657 arg "thesaurus-entry"
44665 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44671 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
44685 \begin_layout Subsection
44686 View/Update Toolbar
44687 \begin_inset Index idx
44690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44691 Toolbar ! View / Update
44699 \begin_layout Standard
44700 \begin_inset Graphics
44701 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
44708 \begin_layout Standard
44709 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
44715 \begin_layout Standard
44716 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
44720 \begin_layout Standard
44721 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
44727 \begin_layout Standard
44728 \begin_inset Tabular
44729 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
44730 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
44731 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
44732 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
44733 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44734 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44756 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44763 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44764 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44772 arg "buffer-update"
44780 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44786 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44793 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44794 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44802 arg "master-buffer-view"
44810 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44816 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44818 \begin_inset space ~
44827 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44828 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44836 arg "master-buffer-update"
44844 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44850 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44852 \begin_inset space ~
44856 \begin_inset space ~
44865 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44866 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44874 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
44882 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44888 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44889 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
44890 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
44891 Synchronize with Output
44897 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44898 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44908 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901299
44918 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44924 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44925 View (Other Formats)
44931 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44938 arg "update-others"
44942 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901301
44950 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44956 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44957 Update (Other Formats)
44970 \begin_layout Standard
44972 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901302
44973 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
44979 \begin_layout Subsection
44983 \begin_layout Standard
44984 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
44985 \begin_inset space ~
44989 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44991 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
44995 , the table toolbar
44996 \begin_inset Index idx
44999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45008 \begin_inset space ~
45013 manual and the math macro toolbar
45014 \begin_inset Index idx
45017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45030 \begin_layout Chapter
45031 The Document Settings
45032 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45034 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
45039 \begin_inset Index idx
45042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45043 Document ! Settings
45051 \begin_layout Standard
45055 \begin_inset space ~
45060 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
45061 is called with the menu
45063 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45067 You can save your document settings as default with the
45069 Save as Document Defaults
45071 button in any dialog.
45072 This will create a template named
45076 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
45077 when you create a new document without
45081 \begin_layout Standard
45086 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
45087 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
45090 \begin_layout Standard
45091 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
45092 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
45093 to find the one you are looking for.
45094 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
45095 the submenus of the dialog.
45097 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45101 \begin_inset space \space{}
45105 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45109 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45112 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
45113 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
45114 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
45117 \begin_layout Section
45121 \begin_layout Standard
45122 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
45124 Document classes are described in section
45125 \begin_inset space ~
45129 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45131 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
45139 \begin_layout Standard
45143 \begin_inset space ~
45148 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
45153 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
45154 as a layout for a document class.
45155 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
45157 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
45166 \begin_layout Standard
45167 Some classes use special class options by default.
45168 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
45172 and you can decide to use them or not.
45173 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
45174 recommended you leave them untouched.
45179 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
45180 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
45185 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45187 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
45192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45193 When you want to use one of the following drivers
45194 \begin_inset Newline newline
45199 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
45202 \begin_inset Newline newline
45205 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
45206 distribution, see section
45211 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45213 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
45226 \begin_layout Standard
45231 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
45232 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
45233 in the background if the child document
45234 is opened without its master.
45235 This way child documents are always compilable.
45236 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
45243 \begin_inset space ~
45251 \begin_layout Standard
45252 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45263 \begin_inset Index idx
45266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45268 packages ! prettyref
45274 \begin_inset Index idx
45277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45279 packages ! refstyle
45284 for cross-references, see section
45285 \begin_inset space ~
45289 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45291 reference "sec:Cross-References"
45298 \begin_layout Section
45302 \begin_layout Standard
45303 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
45304 Please refer to the section
45307 \begin_inset space ~
45315 \begin_inset space ~
45320 manual for details.
45323 \begin_layout Section
45327 \begin_layout Standard
45328 Modules are explained in section
45329 \begin_inset space ~
45333 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45335 reference "subsec:Modules"
45342 \begin_layout Section
45346 \begin_layout Standard
45348 \begin_inset space ~
45352 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45354 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
45361 \begin_layout Section
45365 \begin_layout Standard
45366 The document font settings are described in section
45367 \begin_inset space ~
45371 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45373 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
45380 \begin_layout Section
45384 \begin_layout Standard
45385 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
45397 \begin_inset space ~
45402 and whether it should be a
45405 \begin_inset space ~
45410 can also be specified here.
45413 \begin_layout Standard
45414 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
45415 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
45416 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
45418 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
45421 \begin_layout Standard
45424 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
45427 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
45428 justifies the text on screen.
45429 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
45431 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288869
45435 \begin_layout Standard
45437 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288904
45446 lets you select which style newly inserted tables should use by default.
45451 \begin_layout Section
45455 \begin_layout Standard
45456 This dialog is described in sections
45457 \begin_inset space ~
45461 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45463 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
45468 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45470 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
45477 \begin_layout Section
45481 \begin_layout Standard
45482 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
45483 \begin_inset space ~
45487 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45489 reference "subsec:Margins"
45496 \begin_layout Section
45498 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45500 name "sec:Language-encodings"
45505 \begin_inset Index idx
45508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45509 Language ! Encoding
45517 \begin_layout Standard
45518 The document language and quote styles are set here.
45519 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
45520 (the \SpecialChar LyX
45522 is always encoded in utf8).
45523 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
45524 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
45525 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
45526 -command is not known for
45527 a particular character).
45528 \change_inserted -712698321 1557594829
45532 \begin_layout Standard
45534 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596095
45535 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
45536 outputs \SpecialChar LaTeX
45537 files in Unicode – or utf8, for that matter (which
45538 is nowadays also \SpecialChar LaTeX
45539 's default encoding).
45540 This should normally fit your needs, since \SpecialChar LaTeX
45541 's Unicode support covers the
45542 characters of most scripts.
45543 Nonetheless it is not yet comprehensive, so there might be cases where
45544 using one of the traditional, or
45545 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45549 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45552 , encodings is necessary.
45555 \begin_layout Standard
45557 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596136
45559 provides support for these traditional encodings.
45562 Traditional (auto-selected)
45568 dropdown, \SpecialChar LyX
45569 automatically selects the appropriate traditional encoding for
45570 the given language(s).
45572 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595310
45576 \begin_layout Standard
45578 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595310
45579 If you use the option
45584 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
45587 If the document contains text in more than one language you
45588 \change_inserted -712698321 1557595342
45591 may get more than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45594 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595350
45595 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
45596 exactly one encoding.
45597 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
45602 \begin_layout Standard
45604 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596155
45605 As a third option, \SpecialChar LyX
45611 If this is chosen, any character outside the 7bit ASCII range will be output
45612 as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
45616 \begin_layout Standard
45618 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645585
45619 Finally, you can also select
45623 , which lets you specify a specific (single) encoding for the whole document.
45624 Note that this encoding is then used for
45629 The custom list (which is spelled out below) consists of traditional encodings
45630 and some special cases of Unicode for specific purposes (see explanation
45634 \begin_layout Standard
45636 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
45639 Do not load inputenc
45641 checkbox does what it states: It prevents \SpecialChar LyX
45642 from automatically loading the
45649 \begin_inset Index idx
45652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45654 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645185
45656 packages ! inputenc
45662 This option might be useful if you use a class or package that pre-loads
45663 inputenc or if inputenc must not be used for some reason.
45664 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
45665 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
45666 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
45668 Note that this option is only available for the standard
45674 Traditional (auto-selected)
45681 \begin_layout Standard
45683 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596063
45685 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
45686 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
45687 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
45688 installation supports Unicode), choose
45689 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
45690 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
45691 is quite incomplete, so
45692 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
45697 (when \SpecialChar LyX
45698 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
45699 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
45700 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
45701 -commands is not used, because all
45702 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
45703 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
45704 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
45705 , two new alternative engines
45706 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
45708 Both engines support Unicode natively.
45710 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
45713 \begin_inset space ~
45721 \begin_inset space ~
45729 \begin_inset space ~
45735 \begin_inset space ~
45739 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45741 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
45746 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
45750 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
45755 \begin_layout Standard
45759 \begin_inset space ~
45764 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45765 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
45767 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45771 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45775 The possible settings are:
45778 \begin_layout Description
45779 Default uses the language package that is selected in
45781 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45782 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
45786 \begin_inset space ~
45790 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45792 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
45799 \begin_layout Description
45800 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
45801 format you will use.
45802 In many cases this will be
45807 \begin_inset Index idx
45810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45818 If the newer package
45823 \begin_inset Index idx
45826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45828 packages ! polyglossia
45833 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
45834 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
45835 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
45837 this package will be used instead of
45844 \begin_layout Description
45846 \begin_inset space ~
45857 would be more appropriate.
45860 \begin_layout Description
45861 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
45862 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
45866 (for German texts), type in
45869 \begin_inset Newline newline
45874 usepackage{ngerman}
45877 \begin_layout Description
45878 None will not use a language package.
45879 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
45882 \begin_layout Standard
45883 Here is a list with the important encodings:
45886 \begin_layout Description
45888 \change_deleted -712698321 1557645284
45890 \begin_inset space ~
45894 \begin_inset space ~
45898 \begin_inset space ~
45905 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45911 \begin_inset Index idx
45914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45916 packages ! inputenc
45922 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
45923 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
45924 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
45930 \begin_layout Description
45931 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
45933 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
45934 commands, which may result in a big
45935 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
45936 -commands are needed.
45938 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596221
45939 This is the same as the
45952 \begin_layout Description
45954 \begin_inset space ~
45958 \begin_inset space ~
45961 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
45964 \begin_layout Description
45966 \begin_inset space ~
45970 \begin_inset space ~
45973 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
45976 \begin_layout Description
45978 \begin_inset space ~
45981 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
45984 \begin_layout Description
45986 \begin_inset space ~
45990 \begin_inset space ~
45993 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
45994 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
45997 \begin_layout Description
45999 \begin_inset space ~
46003 \begin_inset space ~
46006 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
46010 \begin_layout Description
46012 \begin_inset space ~
46016 \begin_inset space ~
46019 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
46020 ISO-8859-13 encoding
46023 \begin_layout Description
46025 \begin_inset space ~
46029 \begin_inset space ~
46033 \begin_inset space ~
46036 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
46037 \begin_inset space ~
46043 \begin_layout Description
46045 \begin_inset space ~
46049 \begin_inset space ~
46053 \begin_inset space ~
46056 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
46057 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
46060 \begin_layout Description
46062 \begin_inset space ~
46066 \begin_inset space ~
46069 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
46070 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
46071 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
46072 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
46073 \begin_inset space ~
46077 \begin_inset space ~
46083 \begin_layout Description
46085 \begin_inset space ~
46089 \begin_inset space ~
46092 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
46093 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
46094 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
46096 should try to use the encoding Unicode
46097 \begin_inset space ~
46101 \begin_inset space ~
46107 \begin_layout Description
46109 \begin_inset space ~
46113 \begin_inset space ~
46116 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
46119 \begin_layout Description
46121 \begin_inset space ~
46125 \begin_inset space ~
46128 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
46131 \begin_layout Description
46133 \begin_inset space ~
46137 \begin_inset space ~
46140 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
46143 \begin_layout Description
46145 \begin_inset space ~
46148 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
46151 \begin_layout Description
46153 \begin_inset space ~
46156 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
46159 \begin_layout Description
46161 \begin_inset space ~
46165 \begin_inset space ~
46168 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
46171 \begin_layout Description
46173 \begin_inset space ~
46177 \begin_inset space ~
46183 \begin_layout Description
46185 \begin_inset space ~
46189 \begin_inset space ~
46192 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
46195 \begin_layout Description
46197 \begin_inset space ~
46201 \begin_inset space ~
46207 \begin_layout Description
46209 \begin_inset space ~
46213 \begin_inset space ~
46216 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46222 \begin_inset Index idx
46225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46232 , when using this, set the document language to
46237 \begin_layout Description
46239 \begin_inset space ~
46243 \begin_inset space ~
46246 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46251 , when using this, set the document language to
46254 \begin_inset space ~
46260 \begin_layout Description
46262 \begin_inset space ~
46266 \begin_inset space ~
46269 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46275 \begin_inset Index idx
46278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46280 packages ! japanese
46285 , when using this, set the document language to
46290 \begin_layout Description
46292 \begin_inset space ~
46296 \begin_inset space ~
46299 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46304 , when using this, set the document language to
46309 \begin_layout Description
46311 \begin_inset space ~
46315 \begin_inset space ~
46318 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46323 , when using this, set the document language to
46328 \begin_layout Description
46330 \begin_inset space ~
46333 (EUC-KR) for Korean
46336 \begin_layout Description
46338 \begin_inset space ~
46342 \begin_inset space ~
46346 \begin_inset space ~
46349 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
46352 \begin_layout Description
46354 \begin_inset space ~
46358 \begin_inset space ~
46362 \begin_inset space ~
46365 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
46366 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
46367 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
46370 \begin_layout Description
46372 \begin_inset space ~
46376 \begin_inset space ~
46382 \begin_layout Description
46384 \begin_inset space ~
46388 \begin_inset space ~
46391 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
46392 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
46395 \begin_layout Description
46397 \begin_inset space ~
46401 \begin_inset space ~
46404 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46410 \begin_inset Index idx
46413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46420 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
46421 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596410
46423 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
46424 with the default encoding (
46426 Unicode (utf8) [default]
46432 dropdown list) with CJK languages.
46433 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
46438 \begin_layout Description
46440 \begin_inset space ~
46448 \begin_inset space ~
46451 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
46458 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
46461 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46468 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
46469 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
46471 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
46474 \begin_layout Description
46476 \begin_inset space ~
46480 \begin_inset space ~
46483 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46489 \begin_inset Index idx
46492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46500 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596443
46503 including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
46505 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596475
46506 This used to be more comprehensive than
46509 \begin_inset space ~
46514 , but meanwhile it is rather outdated.
46519 \begin_layout Description
46521 \begin_inset space ~
46524 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46530 \begin_inset Index idx
46533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46535 packages ! inputenc
46542 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596266
46543 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
46545 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596400
46546 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
46547 with the default encoding (
46549 Unicode (utf8) [default]
46555 dropdown list) with non-CJK languages.
46556 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
46561 \begin_layout Description
46563 \begin_inset space ~
46567 \begin_inset space ~
46571 \begin_inset space ~
46574 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
46575 \begin_inset space ~
46581 \begin_layout Description
46583 \begin_inset space ~
46587 \begin_inset space ~
46591 \begin_inset space ~
46594 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
46595 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
46596 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
46600 \begin_layout Description
46602 \begin_inset space ~
46606 \begin_inset space ~
46610 \begin_inset space ~
46613 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
46614 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
46617 \begin_layout Section
46619 \begin_inset Index idx
46622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46629 \begin_inset Index idx
46632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46639 \begin_inset Index idx
46642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46643 Color ! Shaded boxes
46649 \begin_inset Index idx
46652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46653 Color ! Greyed-out notes
46661 \begin_layout Standard
46662 Here you can alter the font color for the
46666 (default: black), for
46669 \begin_inset space ~
46674 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
46678 (default: white) and for
46681 \begin_inset space ~
46691 sets the color back to the default.
46694 \begin_layout Standard
46695 Clicking any button showing
46703 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
46704 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
46705 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
46706 later more quickly.
46709 \begin_layout Standard
46710 Note, if you change the
46713 \begin_inset space ~
46718 font color and use the option
46721 \begin_inset space ~
46726 in the document settings under
46729 \begin_inset space ~
46734 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
46735 \begin_inset space ~
46739 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46741 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
46748 \begin_layout Standard
46749 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
46755 \begin_layout Standard
46759 \begin_inset space ~
46768 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
46771 \begin_inset space ~
46774 Code after a forced page break:
46777 \begin_layout Itemize
46778 For the page color:
46779 \begin_inset Newline newline
46786 pagecolor{color name}
46789 \begin_layout Itemize
46790 For the text color:
46791 \begin_inset Newline newline
46801 \begin_layout Standard
46802 You are restricted to one of
46838 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
46845 \begin_inset space ~
46851 \begin_inset Newline newline
46854 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
46855 names to refer to them:
46858 \begin_layout Itemize
46864 \begin_inset Newline newline
46869 page_backgroundcolor
46872 \begin_layout Itemize
46876 \begin_inset space ~
46882 \begin_inset Newline newline
46890 \begin_layout Itemize
46894 \begin_inset space ~
46900 \begin_inset Newline newline
46908 \begin_layout Itemize
46912 \begin_inset space ~
46918 \begin_inset Newline newline
46926 \begin_layout Standard
46927 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
46930 \begin_inset space ~
46938 \begin_inset space ~
46946 \begin_layout Section
46948 \change_inserted -712698321 1577206827
46952 \begin_layout Standard
46954 \change_inserted -712698321 1577206929
46955 Here you can do some settings related to change tracking (see sec.
46956 \begin_inset space ~
46960 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46962 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
46970 Alternatively to the menu or toolbar, you can set here whether changes
46971 are being tracked and whether they are shown in the output.
46974 \begin_layout Standard
46976 \change_inserted -712698321 1577207214
46977 Additionally, you can advise LyX to place a change bar in the margin of
46979 This might be useful to make changed passages more salient.
46982 \begin_layout Section
46986 \begin_layout Standard
46987 Here you can adjust the
46991 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
46995 as described in section
46996 \begin_inset space ~
47000 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47002 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
47007 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620045
47011 \begin_layout Standard
47013 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620379
47014 You can typeset lines numbering in the output file by enabling the checkbox
47016 The functionality is handled by package lineno and and additional options
47017 of this package can be used as well.
47018 The most common one are:
47021 \begin_layout Description
47023 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620630
47024 right Line numbers to the right margin
47027 \begin_layout Description
47029 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620589
47030 switch Line number to the outer margin (left – even pages, right – odd pages)
47034 \begin_layout Description
47036 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620637
47037 switch* Line numbers to the inner margin
47040 \begin_layout Description
47042 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620780
47043 modulo Print numbers only on multiples of five lines
47046 \begin_layout Description
47048 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620792
47050 \begin_inset space ~
47053 mathlines Line numbers for math environments (both options needed).
47058 \begin_layout Section
47062 \begin_layout Standard
47063 Here you can specify if a specific citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47069 \begin_inset Index idx
47072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47074 packages ! biblatex
47084 \begin_inset Index idx
47087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47099 \begin_inset Index idx
47102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47110 If you use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
47113 Sectioned bibliography
47115 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47121 \begin_inset Index idx
47124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47126 packages ! bibtopic
47136 , you can select the style files and specify further options.
47137 Finally, you can select a document-specific
47141 for the generation of the bibliography.
47142 For a further description of these possibilities see section
47143 \begin_inset space ~
47147 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47149 reference "sec:Bibliography"
47156 \begin_layout Section
47160 \begin_layout Standard
47161 Here you can define the
47165 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
47167 \begin_inset space ~
47171 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47173 reference "sec:Index"
47180 \begin_layout Section
47184 \begin_layout Standard
47185 The PDF properties are explained in section
47186 \begin_inset space ~
47190 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47192 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
47199 \begin_layout Section
47203 \begin_layout Standard
47204 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
47205 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47211 \begin_inset Index idx
47214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47226 \begin_inset Index idx
47229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47241 \begin_inset Index idx
47244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47256 \begin_inset Index idx
47259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47271 \begin_inset Index idx
47274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47276 packages ! mathdots
47286 \begin_inset Index idx
47289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47291 packages ! mathtools
47301 \begin_inset Index idx
47304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47316 \begin_inset Index idx
47319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47321 packages ! stackrel
47331 \begin_inset Index idx
47334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47336 packages ! stmaryrd
47346 \begin_inset Index idx
47349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47351 packages ! undertilde
47356 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
47359 \begin_layout Description
47360 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
47361 -errors in formulas,
47362 ensure that you have this enabled.
47365 \begin_layout Description
47366 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
47367 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
47368 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
47372 \begin_layout Description
47373 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
47376 \begin_inset space ~
47388 \begin_layout Description
47389 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
47392 \begin_inset space ~
47404 \begin_layout Description
47405 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
47416 \begin_layout Description
47417 mathtools is used for the math commands
47453 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
47460 \begin_layout Description
47461 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
47463 Chemical Symbols and Equations
47472 \begin_layout Description
47473 stackrel is used for the math command
47490 \begin_layout Description
47491 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
47494 \begin_layout Description
47495 undertilde is used for the math command
47503 Accents for one Character
47512 \begin_layout Section
47514 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030304
47516 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030306
47522 \begin_layout Standard
47524 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030352
47525 Here you can set global float placement and alignment options.
47528 \begin_layout Standard
47530 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030366
47531 The float placement options
47532 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030367
47535 are described in the section
47538 \begin_inset space ~
47542 \change_deleted -712698321 1526031799
47544 \change_inserted -712698321 1526031800
47552 \begin_inset space ~
47560 \begin_layout Section
47564 \begin_layout Standard
47565 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
47567 Program Code Listings
47572 \begin_inset space ~
47580 \begin_layout Section
47584 \begin_layout Standard
47585 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
47593 set to be used and set the
47598 The itemize environment is described in section
47599 \begin_inset space ~
47603 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47605 reference "sec:Itemize"
47612 \begin_layout Standard
47613 You can furthermore specify a
47616 \begin_inset space ~
47621 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47622 command of the desired character.
47623 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
47630 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
47632 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47636 \begin_inset space \space{}
47640 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
47650 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
47651 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
47654 \begin_layout Standard
47655 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
47658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47663 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
47664 -packages in the preamble (menu
47667 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
47668 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
47671 \begin_inset space ~
47677 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
47681 usepackage{textcomp}
47684 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
47688 usepackage{amssymb}
47698 \begin_layout Section
47702 \begin_layout Standard
47703 Branches are described in section
47704 \begin_inset space ~
47708 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47710 reference "sec:Branches"
47717 \begin_layout Section
47719 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47721 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
47728 \begin_layout Standard
47729 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
47732 \begin_layout Description
47734 \begin_inset space ~
47738 \begin_inset space ~
47741 Format: The format that is used when you enter
47742 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47746 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47750 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47754 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47758 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47761 View Master Document
47762 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47766 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47769 Update Master Document
47770 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47777 menu or the toolbar.
47778 The default is set in
47780 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
47781 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
47783 \begin_inset space ~
47786 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
47790 \begin_inset space ~
47794 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47796 reference "sec:File-Formats"
47803 \begin_layout Description
47805 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647276
47807 \begin_inset space ~
47811 \begin_inset space ~
47815 \begin_inset space ~
47818 programs If this is switched on, \SpecialChar LaTeX
47823 option which is needed with some packages.
47824 Note that this comes with security risks, so please use this only when
47825 really necessary and if you know what you are doing.
47828 \begin_layout Description
47830 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647006
47832 \begin_inset space ~
47836 \begin_inset space ~
47839 Options offers settings for the
47847 \begin_layout Itemize
47851 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646679
47853 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646679
47855 \begin_inset space ~
47861 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646686
47863 \begin_inset space ~
47867 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646686
47873 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646719
47875 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646729
47876 settings for the menu
47878 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
47882 \begin_inset space ~
47886 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646752
47889 and allows to customize the macro used in this process
47890 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646757
47895 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646759
47897 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646759
47899 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646759
47902 or a detailed description see section
47904 Reverse DVI/PDF search
47909 \begin_inset space ~
47915 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646762
47919 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647009
47923 \begin_layout Itemize
47925 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647929
47928 Put fragile content out of moving arguments
47930 determines whether so-called
47931 \begin_inset Quotes els
47935 \begin_inset Quotes ers
47939 constructs (such as labels or index entries) are placed outside of so-called
47941 \begin_inset Quotes els
47945 \begin_inset Quotes ers
47948 in \SpecialChar LaTeX
47949 (such as sections or captions), even if the corresponding insets are
47950 placed in such context in \SpecialChar LyX
47952 This setting is on by default, since it prevents nasty \SpecialChar LaTeX
47954 If you rely on labels or index entries being kept inside the problematic
47955 macros, you can uncheck this.
47956 If you don't know what we are talking about here, worry not: just leave
47963 \begin_layout Description
47965 \begin_inset space ~
47969 \begin_inset space ~
47972 Options offers settings for the export format
47980 \begin_inset space ~
47985 will assure that the output follows exactly version
47986 \begin_inset space ~
47989 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
47993 \begin_inset space ~
47998 settings are described in detail in section
48000 Math Output in XHTML
48005 \begin_inset space ~
48014 \begin_inset space ~
48018 \begin_inset space ~
48023 is used for the size of equations in the output.
48026 \begin_layout Description
48028 \begin_inset space ~
48033 Save transient properties
48035 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that
48036 are specific to the user are saved with the document.
48037 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
48041 \begin_layout Itemize
48042 the activation of change tracking
48045 \begin_layout Itemize
48046 the output of tracked changes
48049 \begin_layout Itemize
48050 the recording of the document directory path.
48053 \begin_layout Standard
48054 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when
48055 using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts).
48059 \begin_layout Section
48067 \begin_layout Standard
48068 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
48070 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
48072 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
48074 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
48078 \begin_layout Standard
48079 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48080 -syntax is given in section
48081 \begin_inset space ~
48085 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48087 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
48094 \begin_layout Chapter
48100 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48102 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
48107 \begin_inset Index idx
48110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48119 \begin_layout Standard
48120 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
48122 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
48126 It has the following submenus.
48129 \begin_layout Section
48133 \begin_layout Subsection
48137 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48138 User Interface File
48139 \begin_inset Index idx
48142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48143 Customization ! of toolbars
48149 \begin_inset Index idx
48152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48153 Customization ! of menus
48161 \begin_layout Standard
48162 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
48163 interface (ui) file.
48164 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
48172 \begin_layout Description
48177 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
48180 \begin_layout Description
48187 the menu entries in popup context menus
48190 \begin_layout Description
48195 specifies the toolbar buttons
48198 \begin_layout Standard
48199 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
48200 and edit the entries.
48203 \begin_layout Standard
48204 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
48216 entries must be finished with an explicit
48241 and in the case of the
48242 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48246 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48254 The syntax for the entries is:
48257 \begin_layout Standard
48258 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
48264 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48272 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48276 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48281 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48287 \begin_layout Standard
48289 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
48292 All the \SpecialChar LyX
48293 -functions are listed in the menu
48295 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
48297 \begin_inset space ~
48305 \begin_layout Standard
48306 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
48312 \begin_layout Standard
48313 For example, assuming you use the menu
48315 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
48318 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
48322 \begin_layout Standard
48323 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
48329 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48333 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48337 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48341 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48347 \begin_layout Standard
48349 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
48353 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48357 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48364 to have the sixth bookmark.
48367 \begin_layout Standard
48371 \begin_inset space ~
48376 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
48377 's toolbar buttons.
48378 The currently available icon sets are compared in
48379 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48382 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
48390 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48394 \begin_layout Standard
48397 Enable tool tips in main work area
48399 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
48403 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48407 \begin_layout Standard
48412 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
48413 should display in the menu
48415 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
48417 \begin_inset space ~
48425 \begin_layout Subsection
48429 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48433 \begin_layout Standard
48436 Restore window layouts and geometries
48439 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
48440 the last \SpecialChar LyX
48444 \begin_layout Standard
48447 Restore cursor positions
48449 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
48453 \begin_layout Standard
48456 Load opened files from last session
48458 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
48462 \begin_layout Standard
48465 Clear all session information
48467 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
48468 sessions (cursor positions, names
48469 of last opened documents, etc.).
48472 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48474 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48476 name "subsec:Backup documents"
48481 \begin_inset Index idx
48484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48493 \begin_layout Standard
48496 Backup original documents when saving
48498 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
48499 it was saved the last time.
48500 It is stored in the
48503 \begin_inset space ~
48509 \begin_inset space ~
48513 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48515 reference "sec:Paths"
48519 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
48522 \begin_inset space ~
48528 The backup file has the file extension
48529 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48537 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48543 \begin_layout Standard
48546 Backup documents, every
48548 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
48551 \begin_layout Standard
48554 Save documents compressed by default
48556 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
48557 \begin_inset space ~
48561 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48563 reference "subsec:Compressed"
48568 This applies to newly created documents only.
48569 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
48572 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48573 Windows & work area
48576 \begin_layout Standard
48579 Open documents in tabs
48581 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
48585 \begin_layout Standard
48590 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
48595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48597 \begin_inset space ~
48601 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48603 reference "sec:Paths"
48607 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
48614 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
48615 documents will be opened in the same running instance
48616 of \SpecialChar LyX
48618 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
48619 instance is created for each file.
48622 \begin_layout Standard
48625 Single close-tab button
48627 is checked, there will only be one close button (
48637 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
48638 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
48639 Regardless of this option, one can always close a tab by middle-clicking
48643 \begin_layout Standard
48644 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
48647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48652 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
48653 before the change takes effect.
48661 \begin_layout Standard
48666 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
48668 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
48670 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
48674 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
48675 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
48676 and only want to close the view in once instance.
48679 \begin_layout Subsection
48681 \begin_inset Index idx
48684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48691 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48693 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
48700 \begin_layout Standard
48701 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
48705 \begin_layout Standard
48706 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
48709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48714 This section only deals with the fonts
48718 the \SpecialChar LyX
48720 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
48723 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
48724 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
48735 \begin_layout Standard
48736 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
48753 (depends on the system) as its
48756 \begin_inset space ~
48772 \begin_layout Standard
48773 You can change the font size with the
48780 \begin_layout Standard
48785 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
48787 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48790 points have the size of 1
48791 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48795 \begin_inset space ~
48799 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48801 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
48806 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
48807 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48811 The sizes are explained in detail in section
48812 \begin_inset space ~
48816 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48818 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
48825 \begin_layout Subsection
48827 \begin_inset Index idx
48830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48831 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
48838 \begin_inset Index idx
48841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48850 \begin_layout Standard
48851 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
48852 by choosing an item in the
48853 list and selecting the
48860 \begin_layout Standard
48861 By checking the option
48865 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
48868 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
48869 \begin_inset space ~
48873 \begin_inset space ~
48878 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
48881 \begin_layout Subsection
48883 \begin_inset Index idx
48886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48895 \begin_layout Standard
48896 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
48900 \begin_layout Standard
48905 enables previewing snippets of your document.
48906 This feature is described in section
48907 \begin_inset space ~
48911 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48913 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
48920 \begin_layout Standard
48921 Checking the option
48924 \begin_inset space ~
48928 \begin_inset space ~
48932 \begin_inset space ~
48937 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
48940 \begin_layout Section
48942 \begin_inset Index idx
48945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48954 \begin_layout Subsection
48958 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48962 \begin_layout Standard
48965 Cursor follows scrollbar
48967 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
48971 \begin_layout Standard
48972 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
48973 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
48974 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
48977 \begin_layout Standard
48980 Scroll below end of document
48982 is self-explanatory.
48985 \begin_layout Standard
48986 In \SpecialChar LyX
48987 one can jump from word to word by pressing
48994 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
48996 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
48997 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
48998 \change_inserted -712698321 1578924606
49002 \begin_layout Standard
49004 \change_inserted -712698321 1578924785
49007 Keep change tracking markup on copy and paste
49009 is for users who don't want tracked changes to be dissolved on copy and
49010 paste operations (i.
49011 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49014 e., inserted as new text with the deletions removed).
49015 If this is checked, the change-tracked text will be copied and pasted as
49016 is, independent if changes are currently tracked or not.
49017 This also applies to wrapping to\SpecialChar breakableslash
49018 dissolving from insets.
49023 \begin_layout Standard
49026 Sort environments alphabetically
49028 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
49031 \begin_layout Standard
49034 Group environments by their category
49036 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
49039 \begin_layout Standard
49044 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
49055 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49059 \begin_layout Standard
49060 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
49065 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
49066 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
49070 \begin_layout Subsection
49072 \begin_inset Index idx
49075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49082 \begin_inset Index idx
49085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49086 Settings ! Shortcuts
49094 \begin_layout Standard
49099 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
49101 Several binding files are available, among them:
49104 \begin_layout Description
49105 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
49108 \begin_layout Description
49109 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
49121 \begin_layout Description
49122 mac.bind a set of bindings for
49125 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49133 \begin_layout Standard
49134 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
49139 , and binding files for special languages.
49140 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
49141 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49145 \begin_inset space \space{}
49149 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49153 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49157 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
49158 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
49159 will try to use the appropriate binding
49163 \begin_layout Standard
49164 Some binding files, like
49168 , only have a limited scope.
49169 When looking at the end of the file
49173 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
49176 \begin_layout Standard
49180 \begin_inset space ~
49184 \begin_inset space ~
49189 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
49190 in the selected key binding file.
49193 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49195 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49197 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
49202 \begin_inset Index idx
49205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49206 Key Bindings ! Editing
49214 \begin_layout Standard
49215 To add new or modify existing key bindings to your own taste you can use
49216 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
49217 functions and the bound shortcuts.
49218 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
49221 Show key-bindings containing
49224 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
49225 Insert there for example as keyword
49226 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49230 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49233 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
49234 functions that contain
49235 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49239 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49243 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
49244 All \SpecialChar LyX
49245 functions are also listed in the file
49250 that you will find in the
49257 \begin_layout Standard
49258 For example, to add the shortcut
49266 , select the function and press the
49271 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
49272 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
49275 \begin_layout Standard
49276 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
49277 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
49279 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
49280 function names as a semicolon separated list.
49282 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
49287 \begin_layout Standard
49288 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
49291 \begin_layout Standard
49292 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
49294 The syntax of the entries is:
49297 \begin_layout Standard
49303 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49307 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49311 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49316 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49322 \begin_layout Standard
49323 Note, though, that the key combination definition uses a specific syntax.
49324 This applies to the designators of specific modifier keys (e.
49325 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49352 , respectively) as well as to the other keys.
49353 Note particularly that you cannot use non-alphanumeric characters directly
49354 in the definition of the key combination, but must use commands following
49355 the Xlib standard instead (please refer to the existing bind files for
49357 So if you wanted to bind a command to the key combination
49361 , you needed to specify it as
49366 If you use the dialog to edit key bindings, you don't have to care for
49369 transforms your input to the correct syntax.
49372 \begin_layout Subsection
49374 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49376 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
49381 \begin_inset Index idx
49384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49391 \begin_inset Index idx
49394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49395 Settings ! Keyboard Map
49403 \begin_layout Standard
49404 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
49405 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
49406 provides keyboard maps.
49407 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
49408 is a Romanian one, you can enable
49411 \begin_inset space ~
49415 \begin_inset space ~
49420 and select the keyboard map file named
49427 \begin_layout Standard
49436 keyboard map and, if you use the
49440 bindings, you can select the first and second with
49443 arg "keymap-primary"
49449 arg "keymap-secondary"
49452 respectively or toggle between them with
49455 arg "keymap-toggle"
49461 \begin_layout Standard
49462 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
49465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49470 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
49479 \begin_layout Standard
49480 You can also specify the mouse
49482 Wheel scrolling speed
49485 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
49489 Middle mouse button pasting
49491 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
49492 inserts the content of the clipboard.
49495 \begin_layout Standard
49503 \begin_inset space ~
49507 \begin_inset space ~
49512 you can select a key for zooming.
49513 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
49516 \begin_layout Subsection
49520 \begin_layout Standard
49521 Input completion is described in section
49522 \begin_inset space ~
49526 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49528 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
49535 \begin_layout Section
49537 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49544 \begin_inset Index idx
49547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49554 \begin_inset Index idx
49557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49566 \begin_layout Standard
49567 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
49568 are normally determined during
49570 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
49573 \begin_layout Description
49575 \begin_inset space ~
49578 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
49579 's working directory.
49580 It is the default when you
49591 \begin_inset space ~
49599 \begin_layout Description
49601 \begin_inset space ~
49604 templates This directory
49605 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354019
49606 contains the templates that are shown
49607 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354025
49608 will be opened when you use the menu
49609 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354026
49614 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
49616 \begin_inset space ~
49620 \begin_inset space ~
49628 \begin_layout Description
49630 \begin_inset space ~
49633 files This directory
49634 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354035
49635 will be opened when you use the
49636 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354048
49637 contains the example files that are listed in
49640 \change_deleted -712698321 1553352959
49649 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
49651 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352950
49653 \change_deleted -712698321 1553352963
49659 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354004
49661 \begin_inset Newline newline
49665 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
49668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49677 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
49678 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
49688 \begin_layout Description
49690 \begin_inset space ~
49694 \begin_inset Index idx
49697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49703 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
49704 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
49705 \begin_inset space ~
49709 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49711 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
49719 will be used to save the backups.
49720 \begin_inset Newline newline
49723 Backup files have the ending
49724 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49728 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49734 \begin_layout Description
49736 \begin_inset space ~
49739 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
49740 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
49742 \begin_inset Newline newline
49749 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
49755 You can edit this file with the program
49764 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
49765 in its preferences under
49768 \begin_inset space ~
49774 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
49779 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
49781 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
49782 in your \SpecialChar LyX
49788 and \SpecialChar LyX
49789 need to be running the same time.
49790 \begin_inset Newline newline
49793 The pipe is also used for the
49797 feature, see section
49798 \begin_inset space ~
49802 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49804 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
49809 \begin_inset Newline newline
49812 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
49813 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
49814 \begin_inset Newline newline
49830 \begin_layout Description
49832 \begin_inset space ~
49835 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
49838 \begin_layout Description
49840 \begin_inset space ~
49843 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
49844 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
49845 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
49848 \begin_layout Description
49850 \begin_inset space ~
49853 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
49859 You only need to specify it if you are using
49863 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
49865 For \SpecialChar LyX
49870 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
49874 \begin_layout Description
49876 \begin_inset space ~
49879 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
49880 When \SpecialChar LyX
49881 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
49882 to find it on the system.
49883 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
49885 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
49887 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49891 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49894 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
49895 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
49898 \begin_layout Description
49900 \begin_inset space ~
49903 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
49904 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
49905 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
49906 code or in the document
49908 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
49910 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
49911 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
49912 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
49913 scanned for the input files.
49914 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
49915 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
49917 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths; otherwise
49918 compilation may fail for some documents.
49921 \begin_layout Section
49925 \begin_layout Standard
49926 Here you can insert your
49935 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
49937 \begin_inset space ~
49941 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49943 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
49947 , to mark changes you make as yours.
49950 \begin_layout Section
49952 \begin_inset Index idx
49955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49956 Language ! Settings
49962 \begin_inset Index idx
49965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49966 Settings ! Language
49974 \begin_layout Subsection
49976 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49978 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
49985 \begin_layout Description
49987 \begin_inset space ~
49991 \begin_inset space ~
49994 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
49996 You can find its actual translation status here:
49997 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49999 target "https://www.lyx.org/I18n"
50005 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708959
50009 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50011 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708986
50012 LaTeX Language Support
50017 \begin_layout Description
50019 \begin_inset space ~
50022 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
50023 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
50024 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
50025 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
50026 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50030 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50034 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50038 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50042 The most widespread language package is
50047 \begin_inset Index idx
50050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50057 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
50059 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
50060 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
50061 come with the alternative
50067 \begin_inset Index idx
50070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50072 packages ! polyglossia
50077 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
50078 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
50084 The available selections are described in section
50085 \begin_inset space ~
50089 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50091 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
50098 \begin_layout Description
50100 \begin_inset space ~
50104 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708374
50105 If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
50106 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
50108 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708374
50112 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708377
50116 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708382
50118 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708384
50122 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708639
50123 that is used to switch to a different language
50124 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708410
50125 to start the package
50129 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708611
50130 This might be useful if you want to use a different command with
50134 (which provides several alternative commands with different behavior),
50135 or if you use a custom language package with specific commands, such as
50138 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
50142 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
50150 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708616
50158 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708621
50161 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
50163 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
50167 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
50185 selectlanguage{$$lang}
50186 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708571
50193 is a placeholder that is substituted with the respective language name
50194 in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50199 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708571
50204 , this setting is ignored.
50209 \begin_layout Description
50211 \begin_inset space ~
50215 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857836
50222 \change_inserted -712698321 1563857869
50223 Use this if the language switch set in
50227 needs to be explicitly ended, as in
50231 's alternative command
50235 begin{otherlanguage*}\SpecialChar ldots
50236 \SpecialChar allowbreak
50239 end{otherlanguage*}
50243 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708866
50244 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
50245 command toggles the package on and off
50246 \change_inserted -712698321 1563858041
50247 Empty by default, as
50251 selectlanguage{$$lang}
50253 does not need to be explicitly ended (the switch remains valid until the
50258 selectlanguage{$$lang}
50264 \change_inserted -712698321 1563857868
50269 , this setting is ignored.
50274 \begin_layout Description
50276 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708996
50278 \begin_inset space ~
50282 \begin_inset space ~
50285 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
50289 \begin_layout Description
50291 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708996
50293 \begin_inset space ~
50297 \begin_inset space ~
50300 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
50306 \begin_layout Description
50308 \begin_inset space ~
50312 \begin_inset space ~
50316 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709051
50318 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709052
50321 this option is set, the languages used in the document will be added
50322 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709127
50325 to the document class options
50326 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709259
50327 rather than the language package options.
50328 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709186
50332 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709191
50333 so that they can be used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
50335 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709305
50336 Since the document class passes all options in gets to all loaded \SpecialChar LaTeX
50338 all language-aware packages will be informed about the used languages this
50343 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709264
50344 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
50353 \begin_layout Description
50355 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709314
50357 \begin_inset space ~
50361 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709328
50363 \begin_inset space ~
50367 \begin_inset space ~
50371 \begin_inset space ~
50377 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709331
50379 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709331
50382 this option is set,
50383 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709808
50384 the language switch defined in
50387 \begin_inset space ~
50392 is output at the beginning of the document, thereby explicitly switching
50393 to the document language.
50394 This assures that the correct language is used in any case.
50395 This might be needed if you use a non-default
50398 \begin_inset space ~
50403 or if a package resets the document language.
50404 If not set, the language that is active at document start is used (this
50405 usually should be the document language).
50406 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709548
50407 documents start with the chosen document language.
50408 When this option is not set, the
50411 \begin_inset space ~
50416 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50418 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
50421 \begin_inset space ~
50431 \begin_layout Description
50433 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709354
50435 \begin_inset space ~
50439 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709358
50441 \begin_inset space ~
50445 \begin_inset space ~
50449 \begin_inset space ~
50455 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709361
50459 \begin_inset space ~
50463 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709392
50464 Set document language explicitly
50470 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709618
50472 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709618
50478 \begin_inset space ~
50484 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709625
50486 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709626
50490 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709628
50492 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709628
50495 the end of the document.
50496 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709816
50500 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50501 \paragraph_spacing single
50503 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709833
50509 \begin_layout Description
50511 \begin_inset space ~
50515 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709847
50517 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709845
50521 \begin_inset space ~
50525 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709877
50527 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709877
50529 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709878
50533 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709882
50536 in a language different
50537 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709886
50539 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709886
50542 the document language will be
50543 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709907
50544 marked (by default with a blue
50547 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709911
50549 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709911
50553 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709927
50557 \begin_layout Description
50559 \change_inserted -712698321 1563711969
50561 \begin_inset space ~
50565 \begin_inset space ~
50569 \begin_inset space ~
50572 language If set, \SpecialChar LyX
50573 will switch the input language if the keyboard map is
50574 switched via the operating system.
50575 This is particularly useful if you switch between languages with different
50577 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50580 g., English and Hebrew: in this case, switching the keyboard to Hebrew will
50581 automatically switch the input language to Hebrew as well, and vice versa).
50586 \begin_layout Description
50588 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709926
50590 \begin_inset space ~
50594 \begin_inset space ~
50597 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
50598 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
50603 \begin_layout Description
50605 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710132
50607 \begin_inset space ~
50611 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710132
50613 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710132
50617 \begin_inset space ~
50621 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710265
50622 Here you can define how cursor movement (with the arrow keys) behaves
50623 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710266
50625 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710267
50629 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710171
50631 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710286
50632 scripts with right-to-left direction (e.g., Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi).
50634 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
50635 , you can define if the left and right arrow keys move the cursor visually
50636 to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
50638 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859701
50643 \begin_layout Standard
50648 means that the cursor
50649 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859940
50650 follows the logic of the text direction, and the arrows' direction relates
50651 to the directionality of the main paragraph language.
50653 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50656 g., in embedded right-to-left text in a left-to-right paragraph (say, Hebrew
50657 embedded in English), the cursor starts at the right (that is, at the
50661 of the embedded passage in the right-to-left logic) when coming from the
50663 The meaning of the key is thus swapped for that part; right arrow in this
50664 specific case always means: move
50668 in text (even if this means:
50674 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
50675 is moved to the left when pressing the right arrow key
50676 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859705
50677 This setting might be useful in texts that mix left-to-right and right-to-left
50678 scripts, since the cursor then follows a coherent
50679 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50683 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50690 \begin_layout Standard
50692 \change_inserted -712698321 1563860084
50697 means: always move to the direction towards which the arrows really point.
50698 In this case, in embedded right-to-left text in a left-to-right paragraph,
50699 the cursor starts at the left (in the text logic:
50703 ) when coming from the left.
50704 The visual meaning of the key is thus maintained in all cases, at the expense
50706 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
50707 and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
50708 \change_inserted -712698321 1563858627
50713 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50715 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710235
50719 \begin_layout Description
50721 \change_inserted -712698321 1563776004
50723 \begin_inset space ~
50727 \begin_inset space ~
50730 separator Defines the default decimal separator for use in tables (decimal
50731 separator alignment).
50732 By default, the appropriate character for the current language is selected
50734 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50737 g., dot for English, comma for German), but you can also specify a specific
50738 (static) custom character here.
50741 \begin_layout Description
50743 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709001
50745 \begin_inset space ~
50749 \begin_inset space ~
50752 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
50758 \begin_layout Subsection
50762 \begin_layout Standard
50763 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
50764 \begin_inset space ~
50768 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50770 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
50777 \begin_layout Section
50781 \begin_layout Subsection
50783 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50785 name "subsec:General-output"
50792 \begin_layout Description
50794 \begin_inset space ~
50797 search Commands that will be used for the menu
50799 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
50801 \begin_inset space ~
50807 For a detailed description see section
50809 Reverse DVI/PDF search
50814 \begin_inset space ~
50822 \begin_layout Description
50824 \begin_inset space ~
50827 Options Options for the program
50831 that is used for the export format
50836 \begin_inset space ~
50840 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50842 reference "subsec:Export"
50847 Possible options are listed in the
50852 \begin_inset Newline newline
50856 \begin_inset Flex URL
50859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50861 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
50871 \begin_layout Description
50873 \begin_inset space ~
50877 \begin_inset space ~
50880 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
50883 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
50884 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
50886 \begin_inset space ~
50892 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
50895 \begin_layout Description
50897 \change_deleted -712698321 1534601711
50899 \begin_inset space ~
50903 \begin_inset Index idx
50906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50913 \begin_inset Index idx
50916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50917 Settings ! Date format
50922 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
50923 \begin_inset Newline newline
50927 \begin_inset Flex URL
50930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50932 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
50938 \begin_inset Newline newline
50941 For example the format
50942 \begin_inset Newline newline
50946 \begin_inset Newline newline
50949 prints the date as day/month/year.
50954 \begin_layout Description
50956 \begin_inset space ~
50960 \begin_inset space ~
50963 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
50964 is allowed to overwrite on export.
50967 \begin_layout Subsection
50973 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50975 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
50980 \begin_inset Index idx
50983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50984 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
50993 \begin_layout Description
50995 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413534
50997 \begin_inset space ~
51005 \begin_inset space ~
51009 \begin_inset space ~
51012 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
51017 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
51038 are used for Cyrillic.
51039 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
51040 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51048 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51052 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
51054 sets up in the background.
51055 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
51060 \begin_layout Description
51062 \begin_inset space ~
51066 \begin_inset space ~
51070 \begin_inset space ~
51074 \begin_inset space ~
51077 options They only have an effect when the program
51081 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
51084 \begin_layout Standard
51085 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
51086 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
51087 manuals of the applications.
51090 \begin_layout Description
51092 \begin_inset space ~
51095 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
51096 \begin_inset space ~
51100 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51102 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
51109 \begin_layout Description
51111 \begin_inset space ~
51114 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
51115 \begin_inset space ~
51119 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51121 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
51128 \begin_layout Description
51130 \begin_inset space ~
51133 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
51134 \begin_inset space ~
51138 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51140 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
51147 \begin_layout Description
51153 \begin_inset space ~
51156 command Command for the program
51158 Check\SpecialChar TeX
51161 that is described in the section
51163 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
51168 Additional Features
51173 \begin_layout Standard
51174 There are additionally the following options:
51177 \begin_layout Description
51179 \begin_inset space ~
51183 \begin_inset space ~
51187 \begin_inset space ~
51191 \begin_inset space ~
51196 \begin_inset space ~
51199 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
51200 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51206 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51210 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51214 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51217 to separate folders.
51218 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
51220 \begin_inset Index idx
51223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51230 \begin_inset Index idx
51233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51242 \begin_layout Description
51244 \begin_inset space ~
51248 \begin_inset space ~
51252 \begin_inset space ~
51256 \begin_inset space ~
51260 \begin_inset space ~
51264 \begin_inset space ~
51267 changes Removes all manually set
51273 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
51274 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
51276 \begin_inset space ~
51281 dialog when changing the document class.
51284 \begin_layout Section
51286 \begin_inset space ~
51290 \begin_inset Index idx
51293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51302 \begin_layout Subsection
51304 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51306 name "subsec:Converters"
51311 \begin_inset Index idx
51314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51323 \begin_layout Standard
51324 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
51325 from one format to another.
51326 You can modify converters or create new ones.
51327 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
51334 \begin_inset space ~
51339 field and press the
51344 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
51348 \begin_inset space ~
51353 drop-down list, modify the
51357 field and press the
51364 \begin_layout Standard
51367 Converter File Cache
51373 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
51375 Maximum Age (in days
51378 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
51379 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
51382 \begin_layout Standard
51383 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
51384 definition, is described in the section
51395 \begin_layout Subsection
51397 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51399 name "sec:File-Formats"
51404 \begin_inset Index idx
51407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51414 \begin_inset Index idx
51417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51426 \begin_layout Standard
51427 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
51437 programs that should be used for certain formats.
51440 \begin_layout Standard
51441 You can also define the
51443 Default output format
51445 that is used when you use
51447 View, Update, View Master Document
51451 Update Master Document
51457 menu or the toolbar.
51460 \begin_layout Standard
51461 More about formats and their options is described in the section
51472 \begin_layout Standard
51473 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
51475 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
51476 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
51477 This is done by specifying a
51482 More about this is described in the section
51493 \begin_layout Chapter
51494 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
51496 \begin_inset Index idx
51499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51506 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51508 name "chap:Units-available-in"
51515 \begin_layout Standard
51517 \begin_inset space ~
51521 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51523 reference "tab:Units"
51527 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
51528 and used in this documentation.
51531 \begin_layout Standard
51532 \begin_inset Float table
51539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51540 \begin_inset Caption Standard
51542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51543 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51558 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
51564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51566 \begin_inset Tabular
51567 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="21" columns="3">
51568 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
51569 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
51570 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle" width="50col%">
51571 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
51573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51582 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51603 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51612 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51617 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51621 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51629 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51640 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51649 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51654 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51658 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51666 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51677 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51686 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51695 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51706 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51715 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51720 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51724 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
51728 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51736 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51747 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51756 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51780 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51789 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51802 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51813 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51842 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51851 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51860 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51871 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51880 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51885 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51889 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51897 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51908 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51917 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51922 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51926 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51934 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51945 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51954 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51959 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51963 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51971 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51982 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51991 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51995 scaled point (65536
51996 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52000 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52019 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52028 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52037 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52050 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52059 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52063 % of height between baselines of two subsequent text lines
52068 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52081 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52090 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52099 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52121 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52130 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52143 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52152 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52161 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52174 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52187 % of original image width
52192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52212 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52221 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52276 \begin_layout Standard
52277 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
52280 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
52287 \begin_layout Bibliography
52288 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52289 LatexCommand bibitem
52296 The \SpecialChar LyX
52298 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52301 target "https://www.lyx.org/Credits"
52307 \begin_inset Newline newline
52311 \begin_inset Flex URL
52314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52316 https://www.lyx.org/Credits
52324 \begin_layout Bibliography
52325 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52326 LatexCommand bibitem
52327 key "latexcompanion"
52332 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
52334 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
52335 Companion Second Edition.
52338 Addison-Wesley, 2004
52341 \begin_layout Bibliography
52342 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52343 LatexCommand bibitem
52349 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
52352 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
52356 Addison-Wesley, 2003
52359 \begin_layout Bibliography
52360 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52361 LatexCommand bibitem
52370 : A Document Preparation System.
52373 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
52376 \begin_layout Bibliography
52377 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52378 LatexCommand bibitem
52388 The \SpecialChar TeX
52392 Addison-Wesley, 1984
52395 \begin_layout Bibliography
52396 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52397 LatexCommand bibitem
52403 The \SpecialChar TeX
52405 \begin_inset Newline newline
52409 \begin_inset Flex URL
52412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52414 https://ctan.org/topic
52422 \begin_layout Bibliography
52423 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52424 LatexCommand bibitem
52430 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
52432 \begin_inset Newline newline
52436 \begin_inset Flex URL
52439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52441 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
52449 \begin_layout Bibliography
52450 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52451 LatexCommand bibitem
52458 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52460 name "Documentation"
52461 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
52468 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
52472 \begin_inset Newline newline
52476 \begin_inset Flex URL
52479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52481 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
52489 \begin_layout Bibliography
52490 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52491 LatexCommand bibitem
52498 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52500 name "Documentation"
52501 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
52506 how to use the program
52508 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
52512 \begin_inset Newline newline
52516 \begin_inset Flex URL
52519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52521 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
52529 \begin_layout Bibliography
52530 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52531 LatexCommand bibitem
52538 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52540 name "Documentation"
52541 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf"
52546 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52552 \begin_inset Index idx
52555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52557 packages ! biblatex
52563 \begin_inset Newline newline
52567 \begin_inset Flex URL
52570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52572 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf
52580 \begin_layout Bibliography
52581 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52582 LatexCommand bibitem
52589 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52591 name "Documentation"
52592 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf"
52597 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52603 \begin_inset Index idx
52606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52614 \begin_inset Newline newline
52618 \begin_inset Flex URL
52621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52623 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf
52631 \begin_layout Bibliography
52632 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52633 LatexCommand bibitem
52640 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52642 name "Documentation"
52643 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
52653 \begin_inset Newline newline
52657 \begin_inset Flex URL
52660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52662 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
52670 \begin_layout Bibliography
52671 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52672 LatexCommand bibitem
52673 key "makeindex-man"
52679 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52682 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
52692 \begin_inset Newline newline
52696 \begin_inset Flex URL
52699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52701 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
52709 \begin_layout Bibliography
52710 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52711 LatexCommand bibitem
52718 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52720 name "Documentation"
52721 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
52731 \begin_inset Newline newline
52735 \begin_inset Flex URL
52738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52740 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
52748 \begin_layout Bibliography
52749 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52750 LatexCommand bibitem
52757 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52759 name "Documentation"
52760 target "https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
52765 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
52767 \begin_inset Newline newline
52771 \begin_inset Flex URL
52774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52776 https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
52784 \begin_layout Bibliography
52785 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52786 LatexCommand bibitem
52793 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52795 name "Documentation"
52796 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
52801 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52807 \begin_inset Index idx
52810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52818 \begin_inset Newline newline
52822 \begin_inset Flex URL
52825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52827 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
52835 \begin_layout Bibliography
52836 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52837 LatexCommand bibitem
52844 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52846 name "Documentation"
52847 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
52852 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52858 \begin_inset Index idx
52861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52863 packages ! enumitem
52869 \begin_inset Newline newline
52873 \begin_inset Flex URL
52876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52878 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
52886 \begin_layout Bibliography
52887 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52888 LatexCommand bibitem
52895 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52897 name "Documentation"
52898 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
52903 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52909 \begin_inset Index idx
52912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52914 packages ! fancyhdr
52920 \begin_inset Newline newline
52924 \begin_inset Flex URL
52927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52929 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
52937 \begin_layout Bibliography
52938 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52939 LatexCommand bibitem
52946 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52948 name "Documentation"
52949 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf"
52954 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52960 \begin_inset Index idx
52963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52965 packages ! hyperref
52971 \begin_inset Newline newline
52975 \begin_inset Flex URL
52978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52980 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf
52988 \begin_layout Bibliography
52989 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52990 LatexCommand bibitem
52997 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52999 name "Documentation"
53000 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf"
53005 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53011 \begin_inset Index idx
53014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53016 packages ! microtype
53022 \begin_inset Newline newline
53026 \begin_inset Flex URL
53029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53031 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf
53039 \begin_layout Bibliography
53040 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53041 LatexCommand bibitem
53048 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53050 name "Documentation"
53051 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
53056 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53062 \begin_inset Index idx
53065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53073 \begin_inset Newline newline
53077 \begin_inset Flex URL
53080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53082 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
53090 \begin_layout Bibliography
53091 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53092 LatexCommand bibitem
53099 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53101 name "Documentation"
53102 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
53107 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53113 \begin_inset Index idx
53116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53118 packages ! prettyref
53124 \begin_inset Newline newline
53128 \begin_inset Flex URL
53131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53133 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
53141 \begin_layout Bibliography
53142 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53143 LatexCommand bibitem
53150 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53152 name "Documentation"
53153 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
53158 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53164 \begin_inset Index idx
53167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53169 packages ! refstyle
53175 \begin_inset Newline newline
53179 \begin_inset Flex URL
53182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53184 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
53192 \begin_layout Bibliography
53193 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53194 LatexCommand bibitem
53201 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53204 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
53209 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
53211 \begin_inset Newline newline
53215 \begin_inset Flex URL
53218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53220 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
53228 \begin_layout Bibliography
53229 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53230 LatexCommand bibitem
53237 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53240 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
53245 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
53247 \begin_inset Newline newline
53251 \begin_inset Flex URL
53254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53256 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
53264 \begin_layout Bibliography
53265 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53266 LatexCommand bibitem
53273 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53276 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
53281 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
53282 for Cyrillic languages:
53283 \begin_inset Newline newline
53287 \begin_inset Flex URL
53290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53292 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
53300 \begin_layout Bibliography
53301 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53302 LatexCommand bibitem
53309 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53312 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
53317 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
53319 \begin_inset Newline newline
53323 \begin_inset Flex URL
53326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53328 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
53336 \begin_layout Bibliography
53337 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53338 LatexCommand bibitem
53345 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53348 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
53353 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
53355 \begin_inset Newline newline
53359 \begin_inset Flex URL
53362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53364 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
53372 \begin_layout Bibliography
53373 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53374 LatexCommand bibitem
53381 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53384 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
53389 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
53391 \begin_inset Newline newline
53395 \begin_inset Flex URL
53398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53400 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
53408 \begin_layout Standard
53409 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
53416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53443 \begin_inset Note Note
53446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53453 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
53454 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
53455 bibliography is the second one:
53463 \begin_layout Standard
53464 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
53465 LatexCommand bibtex
53466 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
53467 options "biblio/alphadin"
53474 \begin_layout Standard
53475 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
53479 \begin_layout Standard
53483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53489 pagedeclaration}[1]{
53492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53498 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
53506 \begin_inset Note Note
53509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53510 This command makes the page number a clickable hyperlink, see sec.
53511 \begin_inset space ~
53515 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
53517 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
53529 \begin_layout Standard
53530 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
53531 LatexCommand printnomenclature
53537 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
53538 LatexCommand printindex